JP7513435B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

In some conventional gaming machines, a meter whose display state can change from level 1 to bell 4 is displayed on an image display device, and when the display state of the meter reaches level 4, one of a number of super reach reach effects is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-221121 A

However, in Patent Document 1, only one of the multiple Super Reach reach effects is executed based on the meter display changing to level 4, which has the problem of not being able to increase interest in the game.

The present invention was developed to address these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in playing.

The gaming machine of the means α is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as suggestion performances that suggest control to the advantageous state;
a development performance execution means capable of executing a first development performance before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified, and capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a performance result of the second suggestion performance;
A chance-up effect execution means for executing a chance-up effect in which the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the number of times the effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect;
A revival special performance execution means capable of executing a revival special performance that notifies the player that the advantageous state will be controlled after the suggestion performance is executed and a performance result is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled;
An operation means operable by a player;
A vibration effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance-up effect execution means includes:
The chance-up effect can be executed so that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed,
The chance-up effect can be executed such that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed,
A plurality of types of chance-up effects including a specific type of chance-up effect can be executed,
When the chance-up effect of a specific mode is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the suggestion effect,
A first period during which the revival special effect is executed is shorter than a second period during which the fourth suggestion effect ends after it is notified that the second suggestion effect will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the second suggestion effect,
The revival special performance execution means, when the fourth suggestion performance is executed after the second development performance is executed, does not execute the revival special performance,
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect,
The predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect have different aspects.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can increase the player's interest in playing the game.
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect A), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), a third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and a fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion in which a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be reached as a performance result of the second suggestive performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion in which a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of reach effect A, and then a reach effect F is executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the reach performance E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
The duration of the second suggestive effect is longer than the duration of the first suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A).
moreover,
An operation means that can be operated by a player (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.);
a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation unit performance pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display performance control pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a light-emitting effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (e.g., lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 with a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern) that causes the operation unit to emit light in response to the predetermined vibration performance;
and a specific effect execution means (e.g., an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute specific effects (e.g., the reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game,
The rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot according to the operation unit performance pattern, etc.), and the rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the use of the operation unit performance pattern, etc.).
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (e.g., execution of a vibration effect in a period AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the vibration state is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (e.g., vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestive effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and in the case where the special suggestive effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special suggestive effect before it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving interest in the game.Furthermore, it is possible to improve interest in the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention relating to the following means A. Conventionally, technology has been proposed for providing a vibration means to a ball launching handle in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, as shown in JP 2007-38019 A. However, there was room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest of the effects produced by the vibrations.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enhances the entertainment value of the game when vibration effects are used.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
An operation means that can be operated by a player (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.);
a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation unit performance pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display performance control pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a light-emitting effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (e.g., lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 with a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern) that causes the operation unit to emit light in response to the predetermined vibration performance;
and a specific effect execution means (e.g., an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute specific effects (e.g., the reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game,
The rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot according to the operation unit performance pattern, etc.), and the rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the use of the operation unit performance pattern, etc.).
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (e.g., execution of a vibration effect in a period AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the vibration state is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (e.g., vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestive effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and in the case where the special suggestive effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special suggestive effect before it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing details of the presentation when a high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation is executed, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a comparison between the early and late presentations. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading preview performance setting process. A diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a meter effect determination process. 13A is a diagram showing whether or not a meter effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. 11 is a timing chart showing the first to fifth timings in each fluctuation pattern. A flowchart showing an example of a reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a branch destination suggestion effect determination process. 13A is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing the reach performance decision ratio when a jackpot is hit, (B) is a diagram showing the reach performance decision ratio when a miss is hit, (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between reach performance C and reach performance D, (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the decision ratio between reach performance C and reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when a jackpot is hit, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the decision ratio between reach performance C and reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when a miss is hit. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a chance-up effect determination process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the period during which chance-up effects can be executed during each reach effect. 13 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed as chance-up effects. FIG. (A) to (D) are figures showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed in each reach effect and the presentation pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the presentation patterns of the chance-up effects in each reach effect. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an image display device according to a modified example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a change rate of the display mode of active display in a modified example. A figure showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the determination rate of the effect pattern in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. A figure showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination rate of the effect pattern in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of the length of the revival performance in a modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process. A figure showing an example of settings for the setting suggestion performance execution decision table. A figure showing configuration examples and setting examples regarding setting suggestion patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A diagram showing an example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. A front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic portion 10SH. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of a jackpot. A figure showing an example of the execution timing and performance period of a vibration effect and a visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance device for characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. A figure showing an example of settings when executing an operation unit performance pattern and a specific linked performance. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing settings of vibration patterns. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of performance using vibration and light emission. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting a continuous performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting the timing at which an operation unit performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. A figure showing an example of the execution of a presentation in which a game effect lamp is illuminated. A figure showing an example of setting a performance period during which a specific linked performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of music playback execution.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot", and if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that, when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 029SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a characteristic feature 029SG according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The characteristic feature 029SG includes an invention 029SG and an invention 033SG.

The gaming machine of the first aspect of the invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect A), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), a third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and a fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion in which a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be reached as a performance result of the second suggestive performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion in which a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of reach effect A, and then a reach effect F is executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the reach performance E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is announced that control will be entered into an advantageous state, and when the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect in an appropriate manner before it is announced that control will be entered into an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The duration of the second suggestion effect is longer than the duration of the first suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the reach effect A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the second suggestion effect can attract the player's attention for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, unlike the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect does not execute a development effect before the effect result is notified, so that even if a special development effect is not executed, the player can be sure to pay attention to whether or not the effect result of the second suggestion effect indicates that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
The development suggestion performance execution means includes:
As the development suggestion effect, a special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect can be executed either during the execution period of the first suggestion effect or during the execution period of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, and Super Reach η, a portion in which a meter effect can be executed during the execution of Reach effect A and the execution of Reach effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect, the special development suggestion effect can arouse the player's anticipation for the special development effect to be executed.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed and the special suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at a second timing without going through the execution of the reach effect A or the reach effect B, and a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is not executed, the special development effect is executed, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not a highly anticipated special suggestion effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when the special suggestion effect is executed and it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when the third suggestion effect is executed and it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by lengthening the period until notification when a highly anticipated special development effect is executed, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
The development suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a special development suggestion performance (e.g., a meter performance) in which a performance mode changes stepwise to suggest the execution of the special development performance, and a special development suggestion performance (e.g., a reach performance development suggestion performance) in which a performance mode changes stepwise to suggest the execution of the special development performance,
The rate at which the presentation mode changes to a specific number in the special development suggestion performance is higher than the rate at which the presentation mode changes to the specific number in the special development suggestion performance (for example, as shown in Figures 11-24 and 11-54, the meter performance changes the display mode of the meter 029SG005M in five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter performance is not executed is included), whereas the reach performance E development suggestion performance changes the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image in two stages).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggestion effect in which a special development suggestion effect is executed and the second suggestion effect in which a special development suggestion effect is executed, and since the special development suggestion effect is more likely to change to a specific stage number than the special development suggestion effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will change to a specific stage number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A seventh aspect of the gaming machine of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 to FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach δ or the super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to suggest that the third suggestion performance, which has a higher expectation than the first suggestion performance, will be executed after the special development performance is executed for a longer period of time than the fourth suggestion performance will be executed after the execution of the special development performance is suggested, thereby increasing the interest in the special development suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of the eighth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect,
When the second suggestion effect is executed, the development suggestion effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestion effect until the effect result of the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, the reach effect E development suggestion effect is a part that can be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game from occurring due to the player perceiving that a special development suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect, thereby informing the player that the result of the second suggestion effect is that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
a favorable result suggestion effect (e.g., a chance-up effect) that suggests that the result of the suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the suggestion effect is being executed, the favorable result suggestion effect being executed based on the number of executions of constituent effects that make up the favorable result suggestion effect (e.g., a portion that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31);
The number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34, during the execution of reach effect F, a total of three effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S, pattern T, or pattern U), whereas during the execution of reach effect A, a total of two effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P or pattern Q)).
The number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is equal to or less than the number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the second suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34, during the execution of reach effect E, a total of two effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S and pattern Q), whereas during the execution of reach effect B, a total of three effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case where a special development effect is executed and then a third suggestion effect is executed before the result of the first suggestion effect is announced, the number of times the constituent effects are executed is greater when the third suggestion effect is executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, thereby making it possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the third suggestion effect; and in the case where a special development effect is executed and then a fourth suggestion effect is executed after it is announced that the second suggestion effect will not be controlled to an advantageous state as a result, the number of times the constituent effects are executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is less than the number of times the constituent effects are executed when the second suggestion effect is executed, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the result of the fourth suggestion effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect,
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the advantageous result suggestion effect (e.g., chance up effect) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect is executed, the expectation degree differs depending on the type of the suggestion effect in which the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-12, the expectation degree of a jackpot differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of types of advantageous result suggestion effects, while drawing the player's attention to which suggestion effects are being executed during which common types of advantageous result suggestion effects are being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 029SG in aspect 11 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9 or 10,
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of displaying an expectation level corresponding image corresponding to the expectation level of the suggestive performance when executing the suggestive performance, and is also capable of changing the expectation level corresponding image to a different expectation level corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestive performance is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-5, when the characters of a reach title image are changed to red halfway through as a chance-up performance, a display mode of an expectation level image showing the expectation level of a jackpot displayed together with the reach title image is changed (the number of stars displayed as the expectation level image is increased)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the image corresponding to the expectation level changes as the advantageous result suggestive effect is executed, so that it is possible to increase attention to the image corresponding to the expectation level, thereby enabling the player to accurately recognize the expectation level of the suggestive effect.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
a specific image suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a specific image suggestion effect (for example, an active display effect shown in modified example 029SG-1) which is an effect different from the suggestion effect and suggests that the advantageous state will be controlled by a display mode of a specific image (for example, an active display) displayed during the suggestion effect (for example, a part which displays an active display in one of a plurality of display modes in an active display area 029SG005F provided in a display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-57 as modified example 029SG-1, and varies the probability of winning depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in);
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a common specific image suggestion effect in common to all of the different types of suggestion effects as the specific image suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which an active display can be displayed in a white circle, a blue circle, or a red circle);
In the first development pattern, the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect executed before the special development effect is lower than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display of the variable display of the super reach η in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed and a reach effect F is further executed before a variable display result is notified as a result of the reach effect A, the rate P2 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect A is lower than the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F).
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modified example 029SG-1, the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach effect F in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η is higher than the rate P1 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach effect E in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which a variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of the reach effect B, a reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and then the reach effect E is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and then the third suggestion effect is executed, the specific image suggestion effect is executed before the start of the special development effect, thereby reducing the risk that the player will be aware in advance that the third suggestion effect will be executed, and since the common specific image suggestion effect is executed appropriately between the third suggestion effect and the fourth suggestion effect according to the degree of expectation, interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect,
The specific image suggestion performance execution means is capable of changing the display mode of the specific image from a first mode (e.g., a white circle or a blue circle) to any one of a plurality of modes including a second mode (e.g., a red circle) having a higher expectation than the first mode;
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development performance is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development performance is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-2, in a variable display in a fluctuation pattern of a super reach η, a rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance F is set higher than a rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance A, and in a variable display in a fluctuation pattern of a super reach ζ, a rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance E is set higher than a rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance B).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and reduces the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player perceiving the degree of expectation as high in advance because the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development performance.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth or thirteenth aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed and the special suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, a part in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from a timing before the reach when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed).
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion performance in the third development pattern is higher than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the special suggestion performance is executed in the third development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach performance I is set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach performance I).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion effect is performed, making it easier for the player to recognize that the special suggestion effect will be executed.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the twelfth to fourteenth aspects,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 11-14 );
A determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11-17) capable of determining that the development performance is executed when the variable display is started;
A determination means capable of determining that the development performance will be executed before the determination by the determination means with respect to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory (for example, in the random number value determination process at the time of winning in variant example 029SG-4, when the CPU 103 determines that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) is a Super Reach, the determination means further determines which of the Super Reach fluctuation patterns from Super Reach α to Super Reach λ it is (a part which determines which of Reach performance A to Reach performance I will be executed during the variable display);
Equipped with
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific image suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed and an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, in variant example 029SG-4, in addition to a circle, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. are provided as the display form of the pending memory table display, and a part that can suggest which of reach effects E, F, G, H, and I the pending memory display will develop into depending on which shape is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggestion presentation before the variable display starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of the first aspect of the invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect C), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect D), and a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect G) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, a portion where a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is executed and it is notified that the performance result will not be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a portion where a reach performance G development notification performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ);
In the first development pattern, a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a premonition performance shown in FIG. 11-9) before the special development performance is executed;
Equipped with
The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), the reach effect D has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach effect C),
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect I is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and then the reach effect G development notification effect is executed, and the reach effect G is further executed).
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, a specific suggestion effect different from the special suggestion effect and the special suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed, and then a reach effect H is executed).
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, the determination rate of the super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the variable display is higher than the determination rate of the super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) in which a reach effect G development notification effect is executed during the variable display).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set longer than the length L8 of the execution period of the reach performance G development notification performance),
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The rate at which the special development effect is executed after the execution of the predetermined effect in the first suggestion effect is different from the rate at which the special development effect is executed after the execution of the predetermined effect in the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), the rate at which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after a premonition effect when a reach effect C is executed is higher than the rate at which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after a premonition effect when a reach effect D is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation can be diversified by combining the types of suggestive presentation and the types of developing presentation, and a predetermined relationship can be given to the suggestive presentation and the developing presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the suggestive presentation and the developing presentation.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
A development pre-effect execution means is provided that can execute a development pre-effect before the special development effect or the specific development effect is executed (for example, a portion in which a pre-effect is executed from a timing prior to the reach effect H development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, and a portion in which a pre-effect is executed from a timing prior to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ),
The development pre-effect execution means is capable of executing the development pre-effect common to the case where the special development effect is executed and the case where the specific development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-51, a part in which a pre-effect of a common mode is executed between the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pre-development performance is executed to increase attention to the development performance, while also drawing the player's attention to whether the development performance to be executed is a special development performance or a specific development performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
a development suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10 after the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the branch destination suggestion performance in the branch destination performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-27 ) capable of executing a special development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Z displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5) that suggests the execution of the special development performance, a specific development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Y displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) that suggests the execution of the specific development performance, and a common development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern X displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X on the image display device 5);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether a special development suggestion effect, a specific development suggestion effect, or a common development suggestion effect will be executed as the development suggestion effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller than the first difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in 11-30(D), in the case of a super reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance and a reach performance I are executed before the performance result is announced as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, Regarding the variation pattern and the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as the reach performance C or the reach performance D, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 60%, whereas the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it becomes possible to guess whether it is the first development pattern in which a special development effect is executed, or the second development pattern in which a special development effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern are the same or approximately the same (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the execution decision rate of reach performance C and the execution decision rate of reach performance D are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to expect that the second development pattern will result in the special development effect being executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth or fifth aspect,
The expectation level when the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern is the same or substantially the same as the expectation level when the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the jackpot expectation level when the execution of reach performance C is determined and the jackpot expectation level when the execution of reach performance D is determined are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is possible to similarly expect that an advantageous state will be achieved, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the seventh aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
an advantageous result suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) capable of executing a first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the first suggestion effect will be advantageous to the player while the first suggestion effect is being executed, and a second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the second suggestion effect will be advantageous to the player while the second suggestion effect is being executed;
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
Equipped with
The rate at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the rate at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-6, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach κ, a portion that can determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C and when it is reach effect D).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the development suggestion effect, which suggests the execution of a special development effect, differs between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the suggestion that the development suggestion effect will be executed can be appropriately given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the eighth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
an advantageous result suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) capable of executing a first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the first suggestion effect will be advantageous to the player while the first suggestion effect is being executed, and a second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the second suggestion effect will be advantageous to the player while the second suggestion effect is being executed;
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
Equipped with
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modified example 029SG-13, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of a super reach κ in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect and a reach effect I are executed before a variable display result (miss) is notified as a result of the effect of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, a part capable of determining whether or not to execute a chance-up effect at different rates when the execution of the reach effect C is determined and when the execution of the reach effect D is determined).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect, which suggest that the result of the presentation will be advantageous, differs between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the suggestion of the presentation result can be made in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
The degree of relationship between the suggestion by the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect is that the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect, and the degree of relationship between the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect is higher than the relationship between the result of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A), the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ according to the variable display result. In other words, the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern are determined according to whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed and whether it develops into any of the reach effects G to I, and which of these reach effects G to I it develops into).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestions given by the first special development effect and the second special development effect are closely related to the execution of a specific development effect or a special development effect close to the time of execution of the first special development effect or the second special development effect, so that the execution of the first special development effect and the second special development effect can increase attention to the specific development effect or the special development effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to ninth aspects,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed differs before and after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-12, the portion in which the probability of winning differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by being able to preferably execute the first advantageous outcome suggestion display or the second advantageous outcome suggestion display, it is possible to increase attention as to whether the first or second development pattern will occur.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to tenth aspects,
The notification modes of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance include a first notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is simply notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and the variable display ends), and a second notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is notified once, and then the fact that the performance will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D, and then the variable display result is once notified as a jackpot).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when the result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when the result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are notified in the second notification mode, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise, and the process of deciding to execute the first advantageous outcome suggestive effect or the second advantageous outcome suggestive effect can be standardized between the case where the result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified in the first notification mode and the case where the result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified in the second notification mode, thereby reducing the amount of data required for the process.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to eleventh aspects,
The notification modes of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance include a first notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is simply notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and the variable display ends), and a second notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is notified once, and then the fact that the performance will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D, and then the variable display result is once notified as a jackpot).
When the special development effect is executed after the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed in the case where it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled in the suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is different from the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed in the case where the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-8, reach effect C or reach effect D is executed, and this In the case where the variable display result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance G is a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot), the percentage at which the chance up performance is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the percentage at which the chance up performance is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed can be varied depending on whether or not a special development effect is executed before it is announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in aspect 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of advantageous result suggestion effects (e.g., branch destination suggestion effects of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z) including the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect,
The execution rate of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the execution rate of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect differs depending on whether the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X, pattern Y, or pattern Z).
During the execution of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, if the special development effect is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect with the highest execution rate of the special development effect is executed, the result of the effect notifying that the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect being executed will be controlled to the advantageous state will be (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-9, in the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern Z but the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed, or in the case where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed but the reach effect I is executed, the part that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can give the player a sense of surprise and can also make the player pay attention to whether or not a special development effect will be executed when a special advantageous result suggestion effect or a special suggestion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 11-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 029SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 11-1 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-1(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not and the type of jackpot (probable win or non-probable win) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-1(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 11-2, in this feature section 029SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 11-3 shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 029SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 029SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 029SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 029SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 029SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 11-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 029SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 029SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 11-4 (B). In this feature section 029SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 029SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 11-5 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 029SG has one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 029SG, eleven types of fluctuation patterns are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns: Super reach α, Super reach β, Super reach γ, Super reach δ, Super reach ε, Super reach ζ, Super reach η, Super reach θ, Super reach ι, Super reach κ, and Super reach λ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 12 or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only 10 or less types may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 029SG are: Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2); Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3); Super Reach γ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) and a miss (PA2-4); Super Reach δ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss (PA2-5); Super Reach ε fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss (PA2-6); and Super Reach ζ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-5). There are provided a variation pattern (PA2-7) where the variable display result is a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-6) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach η and a variation pattern (PA2-8) where the variable display result is a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-7) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach θ and a variation pattern (PA2-9) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach ι and a variation pattern (PB1-8) where the variable display result is a miss, a variation pattern (PA2-11) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach κ and a variation pattern (PB1-9) where the variable display result is a miss, and a variation pattern (PA2-12) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach λ.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 029SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, with some exceptions, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern, and the special chart change time of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super The special chart change time is set longer than the special chart change time of the reach ε change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach η change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach ζ change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach θ change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach η change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach ι change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach θ change pattern, and the special chart change time of the super reach κ change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach ι change pattern.

In addition, among these Super Reach α fluctuation pattern to Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, there are no fluctuation patterns for the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern that result in a jackpot. In other words, among these Super Reach α fluctuation pattern to Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, excluding the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern, the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern is set to have the shortest special chart fluctuation time and the lowest jackpot expectation, and the longer the special chart fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

Furthermore, in this feature part 029SG, a Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is provided as a Super Reach fluctuation pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is exceptionally set to have a special chart fluctuation time longer than the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the super reach α variation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) is a variation pattern in which reach performance A with an execution period length of L1 is executed as a reach performance of a super reach during variable display, and the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance A. As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the super reach β variation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) is a variation pattern in which reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 (L2>L1) is executed as a reach performance of a super reach during variable display, and the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance B.

As shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern are also fluctuation patterns that can execute a meter effect that suggests the execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect from the variable display start timing to the reach effect end timing (variable display result notification timing). As mentioned above, since the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A, the length L5 of the meter effect execution period in the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter effect execution period in the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-7 (C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or reach performance D. The execution period of both reach performance C and reach performance D is set to length L3. In addition, the super reach γ variation pattern is also a variation pattern capable of executing a branch destination suggestion performance that suggests which of the following will be executed (which notification performance to branch to) during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D: a reach performance H development notification performance that notifies that a reach performance H will be executed after the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or reach performance D, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance that notifies that either the reach performance F or the reach performance I will be executed.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-7 (D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) is a variation pattern in which a reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 is executed as a reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and then a reach performance E development suggestive performance suggesting development to a reach performance E can be executed (length of the reach performance E development suggestive performance executable period: L6a), and finally, it is a variation pattern that does not develop to a reach performance E and notifies of a miss. Note that the super reach δ variation pattern, like the super reach β variation pattern, is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance (length of the meter performance executable period: L5), and the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestive performance executable period.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (E), the super reach ε variation pattern (PA2-6) is a variation pattern in which, during the variable display, reach performance C or reach performance D (the execution period of either reach performance is L3) is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified that it is a miss, and then a reach performance G development suggestion performance is executed, which suggests development to reach performance G, and finally notifies of a miss without developing to reach performance G. The super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) is a variation pattern in which a reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 is executed as a reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and a reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed after notifying that the variable display result is a miss, and then a reach performance E development notification performance (length of execution period of reach performance E development notification performance: L6b) that notifies that it will develop into a reach performance E is executed, and then a reach performance E is executed. Note that the super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed (length of meter performance executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance B. The length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period. Note that the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter performance executable period. In addition, the Super Reach ζ variation pattern has a period length from the start of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end of the reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result) set to L11.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) is a variation pattern in which reach performance A is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance that notifies the player that the reach performance A will develop into a reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (reach performance F or reach performance I described later in this characteristic part) is executed for a period of L7 (L7>L6b) that is longer than the length of the execution period L6b of the reach performance E development notification performance, and then a reach performance F is executed. The super reach η variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when the reach performance A switches to the high expectation reach performance development notification performance (the length of the meter performance execution period is L4', which is shorter than L4, because the reach performance A switches to the high expectation reach performance development notification performance halfway through). In addition, in the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L12 (L12>L11), which is longer than the length of the period L11 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D (the execution period of either reach performance is L3) is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and after notifying that the variable display result is a miss in these reach performances C or reach performance D, a reach performance G development suggestion performance can be executed, and further, a reach performance G development notification performance that notifies that it will develop into reach performance G is executed for L8 (L7>L8), which is shorter than the execution period L7 of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and further the reach performance G is executed. The super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during variable display, and a pre-performance and a precursor performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D halfway through reach performance C or reach performance D, and then a reach performance H development notification performance is executed to notify that the performance will develop into reach performance H, thereby executing the reach performance H. The super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-9 (J), the super reach κ variation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during variable display, and a pre-performance and a precursor performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D halfway through reach performance C or reach performance D, and further a high expectation reach performance development notification performance with an execution period length of L7 is executed to execute reach performance I. The super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D. In addition, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), which is longer than the length of the period L12 from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance F in the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern that executes a high expectation reach performance development notification performance with a duration of L7 from a timing before the reach in other Super Reach fluctuation patterns during variable display, and executes the reach performance I. The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern that can execute a meter performance from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance (since the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed from a timing before the reach, the duration of the meter performance execution period is L4'' which is even shorter than L4': L4>L4'>L4''). In addition, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) of the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), the same as the Super Reach κ.

In particular, as shown in Figures 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), the high expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature part 029SG includes a blackout performance in which the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make it difficult to see the performance image displayed on the image display device 5, an early performance in which the opening lines are displayed on the image display device 5 after the blackout performance, a switching performance after the early performance, a late performance in which the closing lines are displayed on the image display device 5 after the switching performance, and a movable body performance in which the movable body 32 is dropped (operated) from an origin position above the image display device 5 to a performance position overlapping with approximately the center of the front of the display area of the image display device 5 after the late performance.

As shown in Figures 11-10(B) and 11-55, the first stage performance is a performance in which the lines spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed as a text image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5 and are also output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 11-10(B) and 11-55, the latter stage performance follows the former stage performance and displays the lines spoken by the character as a text image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and also outputs them as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the opening line is "You're not alone...we'll show you everyone's power!", and the closing line is "Miracle attack!".

More specifically, the first stage performance is composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the phrase "You're not alone..." is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the seven letters of "You're not alone..." are displayed in the display area of image display device 5. Then, in the second period, the phrase "I'll show you everyone's power!" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the 12 letters of "I'll show you everyone's power!" are displayed below the letters "You're not alone..." in the display area of image display device 5. The second stage performance is also composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the phrase "Miracle" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the four letters of "Miracle" are displayed in the display area of image display device 5. During the second period, the line "Attack!" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the five letters of "Attack!" are displayed below the word "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5.

In other words, in the front and back performances of this feature part 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the front performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the back performance, and the number of characters displayed in the second period of the front performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the back performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the display manner of the lines in the early performance differs from the display manner of the lines in the late performance, and in particular, the lines in the late performance are displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the display manner of the lines in the early performance.

For example, in the first stage performance, the background screen and character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and a text image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (e.g., "You're not alone...") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) during the first period, and then a text image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (e.g., "I'll show you all our power!") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) during the second period. Also, after the text image 029SG007 (e.g., "You're not alone...I'll show you all our power!") is displayed at its largest and brightest, it is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade-out) and finally disappears. Note that the text image 029SG007 may move while fading in or out.

On the other hand, in the latter stage performance, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the former stage performance, and multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "Mi", "Ra", "Ku", "Ru") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in a manner that rotates and moves from the right side of the display screen toward the center in sequence during the first period (frame-in), and multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "A", "Ta", "T", "Ku", "!") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in a manner that rotates and moves from the bottom side of the display screen toward the center during the second period (frame-in). Also, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") are displayed largest and brightest, they move radially outward and are finally displayed in a manner that disappears outside the display screen (frame-out).

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance is small, flat (two-dimensional), moves slowly (the speed at which the display mode changes due to fade-in), and is displayed at a low brightness. On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the second stage performance is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), moves faster (the speed at which the display mode changes due to frame-in (movement speed)), and is displayed at a high brightness than the character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance (see Figure 11-55).

In addition, as long as the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the latter performance is larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the former performance, the size and brightness of a portion of the character image when fading in or framing in may be inversely related. Also, although the content of the dialogue differs between the former and latter performances, at least some of the content may be the same.

In this way, it can be said that the larger the size of the character images that make up the dialogue, the higher the degree of emphasis; the more three-dimensional the form is than the more planar, the higher the degree of emphasis is for faster movement than slower, and the higher the brightness is than the lower the degree of emphasis is. In the above, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character images are exemplified in the latter stage performance as being more emphasized than in the former stage performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one element of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character images in the latter stage performance is higher than that of the character images in the former stage performance. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis may include a higher degree for thicker characters than for thin characters, and a higher degree for colors than for low saturation or brightness. Furthermore, the degree of emphasis may be increased not only by the display mode of the character images themselves, but also by displaying special images such as effect images around the character images.

Figure 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-5 (super reach ζ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-6 (super reach η jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-7 (super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-8 (super reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-9 (super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

When using the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table to determine the fluctuation pattern, the determination ratio of PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot) is set to the lowest, followed by PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-9 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-10 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-11 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-12 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-13 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-14 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-15 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-16 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-17 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-18 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-19 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-20 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-21 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-22 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-23 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-24 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-25 (fluctuation The determination rate can be set to increase in the following order: PB1-1 (Pear Reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-8 (Super Reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-9 (Super Reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-10 (Super Reach λ jackpot fluctuation pattern) (Determination rate of each Super Reach fluctuation pattern when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table: PB1-2<PB1-3<PB1-4<PB1-5<PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and to provide multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for at least two or more jackpot variation patterns, and to determine the variation pattern using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so that the player can pay attention to which variable display pattern has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A as PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B as PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ miss), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C as PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ miss), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D as PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 029SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or on the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

When determining the fluctuation pattern using miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, the determination ratio of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns (PA1-1 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-2 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-3 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, and PA1-4 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table D) is set highest, followed by PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-5 (super reach δ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach 7 miss fluctuation pattern), and (Super reach ε miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-7 (Super reach ζ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (Super reach η miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 (Super reach θ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (Super reach ι miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (Super reach κ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-12 (Super reach λ miss fluctuation pattern) should be set to decrease in order (Decision ratio of each super reach fluctuation pattern when the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table is selected: PA2-12<PA2-11<PA2-10<PA2-9<PA2-8<PA2-7<PA2-6<PA2-5<PA2-4<PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern judgment table as described above, for the Super Reach fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach The jackpot expectation of the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. As for the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern, as mentioned above, only the fluctuation patterns in the case where the variable display result is a miss are provided, so the jackpot expectation is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are arranged. In addition, a first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 029SG005U are set in two places on the left and right of the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG005U, a reserved memory display that identifiably displays the reserved memory number (special reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special game is displayed. In this characteristic part 029SG, these reserved displays can be displayed in multiple display modes, and a pre-reading notice display (also called a reserved display notice display) that changes the rate at which the reserved memory display is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display (the probability of a jackpot) can be executed.

Furthermore, on the right side of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed, which can change the display mode to five levels (six levels if the state where the meter performance is not executed is included) as the meter performance described above.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 029SG is provided with a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-12, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 029SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 029SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 029SG151C, a game control flag setting section 029SG152, a game control timer setting section 029SG153, a game control counter setting section 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 029SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151A thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 029SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 029SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 3 is provided with a performance control data holding area 029SG190 as shown in Figure 11-13(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 029SG190 shown in Figure 11-13(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 029SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 029SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 029SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 029SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A of this characteristic part 029SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that the start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved display flag, which is set to a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the reserved memory display when a new start winning occurs, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory, in association with whether or not the display pattern associated with the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process (Figure 11-20).

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 029SG5D and the second hold memory display area 029SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (blue circle) or "2" (red circle), which corresponds to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (e.g., a blue circle or a red circle) different from the normal display mode, and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 029SG5D and the second hold memory display area 029SG5U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 029SG executed in step S101 of Fig. 6 will be described based on Fig. 11-14. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the first reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" (step 029SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 029SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" (step 029SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 029SGS103 or step 029SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 (step 029SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 029SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

Following the processing of step 029SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 029SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 029SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 11-15 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 in Figure 11-14 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 029SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S22 in Figure 6, Figure 11-16) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S23 in Figure 6, Figure 11-17) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 029SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance, as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 029SGS121, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 029SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the winning combination is not within the winning combination range, that is, if it is determined that the winning combination is not a winning combination in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is a "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss" (step 029SGS128), is executed, and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 029SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), the losing combination pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), the losing combination pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 029SGS131). In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table A is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved memories is two or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

Also, if it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

In addition, the sending setting of the symbol designation command according to the type of jackpot determined is executed (step 029SGS133), i.e., the second symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command in case of a non-variable jackpot, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, the variable category according to the range of judgment values that includes the random number value MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variable pattern judgment (step 029SGS138). In this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 029SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Figure 11-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 11-16, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 029SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 029SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 029SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry (step 029SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 029SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 029SGS150a). In addition, in this step 029SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 029SGS150a, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types according to whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 029SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it is set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it is set to "3".

After step 029SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 029SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the reserved memory count for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 029SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 11-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets the fluctuation pattern determination table for the jackpot (step 029SGS164).

If the judgment in step 029SGS161 does not indicate that the jackpot flag is on (step 029SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is on to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is on (step 029SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 029SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of the reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and it is determined whether the reserved memory number of the identified variable special chart is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 029SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 029 SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 029 SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 029SGS173).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), the system selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 029SGS174), and proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 029SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 029SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, the process of step 029SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a reach state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 029SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 029SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 029SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is displayed stationary. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step 029SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 11-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol (step 029SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to turn them off (step 029SGS184) if they are turned on, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 029SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 029 SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 029SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 029SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), in step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 029SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 029SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag (specifically, the low probability low base state) (step 029SGS195), and then proceeds to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 029SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 029SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 029SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), steps 029SGS211 and 029SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 029SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 029SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and determines whether there is a new command stored at the start win by checking whether there is an entry with the pending display flag value not set (step 029SGS242).

If there is no entry with the reserved display flag value not set (step 029SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry with the reserved display flag value not set (step 029SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a miss (step 029SGS243). If the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 029SGS243; N), based on the variable display result being a jackpot, a pre-reading notice performance determination table (not shown) is referenced to determine whether to execute a pre-reading notice performance and the display pattern when the pre-reading notice performance is executed (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21 (A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the preview performance and the display pattern (preview type). Specifically, two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue circle in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a red circle in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), for example, it is possible to determine not to execute the pre-reading preview performance 5% of the time, to execute the pre-reading preview performance in display pattern α 30% of the time, and to execute the pre-reading preview performance in display pattern β 65% of the time.

Also, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of an entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a miss (step 029SGS243; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry is identified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern which includes normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 029SGS247, the pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, the display pattern (preview type) and whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance are determined using a determination ratio such as that shown in FIG. 11-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21(B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (preview type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 029SGS247.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in FIG. 11-21(B), for example, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "non-reach", it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 95%, that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern α at a rate of 5%, and that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern β at a rate of 0%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "other", it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 75%, that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern α at a rate of 20%, and that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern β at a rate of 5%. And, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "super reach", it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 65%, that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern α at a rate of 25%, and that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern β at a rate of 10%.

With this setting, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a jackpot than when it is decided not to execute the look-ahead preview performance, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance. Furthermore, when the look-ahead preview performance is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a jackpot when the look-ahead preview performance is executed in display pattern β than when it is executed in display pattern α, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern the reserved memory display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance will be displayed in.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern are determined at the same rate regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading preview performance and the determination rate of the display pattern may be different depending on the jackpot type. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which jackpot type jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether the pre-reading preview performance is executed or which display pattern the reserved memory display is displayed in.

After executing step 029SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 029SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, i.e., whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 029SGS249).

After step 029SGS245 is executed or if it is determined that a preview performance is to be executed (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is display pattern α that indicates the pending memory display in a blue circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is display pattern β that indicates the pending memory display in a red circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

Also, in step 029SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 029SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white circle (step 029SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

After executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the "0", "1", or "2" set in the hold display flag.

Figure 11-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of Figure 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 11-22, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 029SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stop symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbol is determined from among multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as even symbols as the stop symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination (a miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a meter performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a meter performance and the performance pattern (step 029SGS277), and judges whether or not the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern (step 029SGS278). Note that whether or not the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern can be determined by whether or not the change pattern designation command read in the processing of step 029SGS275 is a Super Reach change pattern.

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), proceed to step 029SGS283. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS280).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, Super Reach η, or Super Reach λ (step 029 SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ (step 029 SGS281). If the change pattern of the variable display is that of a Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), a reach performance E development suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a reach performance E development suggestion effect, and the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282); if the change pattern of the variable display is that of a Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach η, or Super Reach λ (step 029SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing a reach performance E development notification effect determination process.

In addition, in the processing of step 029SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, if the change pattern of the variable display is any one of the change patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ (step 029SGS280; Y), a branch destination suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS285; N), proceed to step 029SGS289. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS285; Y), execute a reach performance G development suggestion performance decision process to determine whether or not to execute a reach performance G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS286). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines the reach performance of the super reach to be executed during the variable display from reach performance C and reach performance D according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS287), selects a process table according to the determined reach performance and fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the processing of step 029SGS287, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 11-30(A), if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ (PB1-4), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 50%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ (PB1-7), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι (PB1-8), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 100%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach κ (PB1-9), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ε (PA2-6), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 20%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ (PA2-9), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 100%. Furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern is that of Super Reach κ (PA2-11), the execution of reach performance C is determined with a probability of 60%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined with a probability of 40%.

As shown in Figures 11-30(A) and 11-30(B), the execution of reach effects C and D is determined at different rates according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, so that the overall expectation of a jackpot is set higher for reach effects D than for reach effects C, as shown in Figure 11-30(C).

In addition, regardless of the variable display result, when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which a reach performance H development notification performance and a reach performance H are executed after the execution of a pre-performance and a premonition performance), the execution of a reach performance D is always decided. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance and a reach performance I are executed after the execution of a pre-performance and a premonition performance), there are cases in which a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 029SG, for the variation patterns in which the pre-effect and premonition effects are executed during the variable display (the variation patterns of the Super Reach ι and the Super Reach κ), the rate at which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed in this feature section 029 after the execution of the pre-effect and premonition effects (the rate at which the reach effect I with the highest expectation of a jackpot is executed) is set higher when the execution of the reach effect C is decided than when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. Therefore, in this feature section 029SG, even if the reach effect C with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach effect D is executed during the variable display, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the pre-effect and premonition effects are executed after the reach effect C, so that it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the expectation of a jackpot is low at the time the reach effect C is executed, and thus preventing a decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the reach effect C.

Furthermore, when comparing the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ, in which the variable display result is first announced as reach performance C or reach performance D and then a reach performance G development announcement performance is executed, with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ, in which a pre-performance, a precursor performance, and a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D while the variable display result is being executed, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ is set to 60%. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (E), when the variable display result is a miss, the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ is set to 20%.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach θ and the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach κ can be inferred, depending on whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, as to whether the variable display is a variable display of the super reach κ in which a pre-performance, a precursor performance, and a high expectation reach performance notification performance are executed while reach performance C or reach performance D is being executed, or a variable display of the super reach θ in which a reach performance G development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (miss) is once notified as reach performance C or reach performance D, so that the player can pay attention to whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, which can increase the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a chance-up presentation determination process to determine whether or not to execute a chance-up presentation that indicates an increase in the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the expected probability of a jackpot) during the variable display, and to determine the presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation (step 029SGS289).

After executing the chance-up effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 then starts the process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the processing of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 213 SGS288). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (step 029 SGS290).

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 029SGS292). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In addition, during the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time the variable display performance process is executed, and determines whether the value of the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data. In this way, the variable display of the decorative pattern in this feature part 029SG is executed.

Figure 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S029SGS277 of Figure 11-22 as the meter performance determination processing. In the meter performance determination processing shown in Figure 11-23, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is any one of the change patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ (step 029SGS301). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ (step 029 SGS301; Y), the meter performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS301; N), it is determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS302).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS302; Y), the meter performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS302; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a meter performance and the performance pattern according to the fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-24 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach without shortening) fluctuation pattern, it is decided not to execute the meter performance at a rate of 90%, to execute meter performance pattern A at a rate of 10%, to execute meter performance pattern B at a rate of 0%, to execute meter performance pattern C at a rate of 0%, to execute meter performance pattern D at a rate of 0%, to execute meter performance pattern E at a rate of 0%, and to execute meter performance pattern F at a rate of 0%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 20%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 25%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 50%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is any of the Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ fluctuation patterns, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 10%, meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 5%, meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 15%, meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 40%, meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 30%, meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is that of super reach η, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 95%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 100%.

As shown in Figures 11-24(B) and 11-25, pattern A in the meter performance is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening), pattern B is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening) (a total of two steps increase), and pattern C is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, the second timing, and at the third timing during the period from the reach to the start of the reach performance of the super reach (the period from the reach to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a normal reach fluctuation pattern).

Pattern D is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing when reach performance A or reach performance B is being executed (a total of four steps).Pattern E is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing after the fourth timing when reach performance A is being executed (a timing before the start of the high expectation reach performance start/stop notification performance).Pattern F is a presentation pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the process of 029SGS303, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304). If it has not decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304; N), the meter performance decision process ends. If it has decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304; Y), the decided performance pattern of the meter performance is stored (step 029SGS305), a meter performance start waiting timer corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set, and the meter performance decision process ends (step 029SGS306).

When it has been decided that a meter performance will be performed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter performance start waiting timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the value of the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out, it selects a meter performance process table corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined meter performance, and starts the meter performance process timer. Thereafter, it decrements the value of the meter performance process timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the meter performance process timer has timed out. If the meter performance process timer has not timed out, it executes control of the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the meter performance process timer, and if the meter performance process timer has timed out, it switches the process data and starts the next process data. In this way, it is possible to perform a meter performance during variable display.

As described above, in this feature section 029SG, by executing a meter effect during variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to five stages, and whether or not a high expectation reach effect development effect is executed as a result of the meter 029SG005M increasing to five stages.

Figure 11-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of Figure 11-22 as the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision process. In the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision process shown in Figure 11-26, the performance control CPU 120 first decides whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance according to the change pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). For example, as shown in Figure 11-26 (B), when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach δ, it decides not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 50% of the time, and decides to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 50% of the time. On the other hand, when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach ζ, it decides not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 20% of the time, and decides to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 80% of the time.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS311 that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312). If it has not been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312; N), the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated, and if it has been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312; Y), the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer is set and the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated (step 029SGS313).

When it has been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance will be executed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, if the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, a process table for the reach performance E development suggestion performance is selected, and the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer is started. After that, the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer is decremented by 1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer, and if the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the Super Reach ζ variation pattern in which the reach performance E development notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the Super Reach δ variation pattern in which the reach performance E development notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the variable display in these Super Reach δ and Super Reach ζ variation patterns, the player is drawn to the fact that after the execution of the reach performance B, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed or not, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Figure 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of Figure 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion effect determination process shown in Figure 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A), when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 90% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X in 10% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y in 0% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z in 0% of the time. Also, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ε, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 70% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X in 30% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y in 0% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z in 0% of the time.

In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 50%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X at a rate of 30%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y at a rate of 15%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y at a rate of 70%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern of the variable display is that of a super reach κ, the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X at a rate of 30%, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Y at a rate of 20%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion image X is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting both the execution of a reach performance H development notification effect and the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion image Y is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting the execution of a reach performance H development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, and pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

In this characteristic part 029SG, among patterns X to Z, pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher rate than patterns X and Y when a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed, that is, pattern Z is a performance pattern with a higher execution expectation of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance than patterns X and Y (execution expectation of high expectation reach performance development notification performance: pattern Z > pattern Y, pattern Z > pattern X). Also, pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than patterns X and X when a reach performance H development notification performance is executed, that is, pattern Y is a performance pattern with a higher execution expectation of a reach performance H development notification performance than patterns X and Z (execution expectation of a reach performance H development notification performance: pattern Y > pattern Z, pattern Y > pattern X).

As shown in FIG. 11-28(A), the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern differs depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, not depending on the variable display result. In other words, the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern is determined depending on whether or not it develops into any of reach presentations G to I after reach presentation C or reach presentation D is executed, and which of reach presentations G to I it develops into, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern may differ depending on both the fluctuation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result, or may differ only depending on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS321 that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232). If it has not been decided that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion presentation determination processing is terminated. If it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232; Y), the presentation pattern of the decided branch destination suggestion presentation is stored (step 029SGS323), a timer for waiting for the start of the branch destination suggestion presentation is set, and the branch destination suggestion presentation determination processing is terminated (step 029SGS324).

When it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion performance will be performed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance process during variable display is performed, and determines whether the value of the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, a branch destination suggestion performance process table corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the branch destination suggestion performance is selected, and the branch destination suggestion performance process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the branch destination suggestion performance process timer is decremented by 1 each time the performance process during variable display is performed, and it is determined whether the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the branch destination suggestion performance process timer, and if the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, a branch destination suggestion performance can be performed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, by displaying any one of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is not notified as the reach performance C or reach performance D and the game switches to the pre-performance. Furthermore, depending on whether the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, or branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D, the rate at which the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the pre-performance and the precursor performance and the rate at which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed differ, so that the player can also pay attention to whether the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, or branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5, which increases the player's interest in the game.

Figure 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of Figure 11-22 as the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process. In the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process shown in Figure 11-29, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29(B), when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach ε, the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 50% of the time, and the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined to be executed 50% of the time. Also, when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach θ, the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 20% of the time, and the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined to be executed 80% of the time.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS331 that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332). If it has not been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332; N), the reach performance G development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated, and if it has been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332; Y), the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer is set and the reach performance G development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated (step 029SGS333).

When it has been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance will be executed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, if the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, the CPU 120 selects a process table for the reach performance G development suggestion performance and starts the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer. After that, the CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer by 1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and determines whether the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the CPU 120 executes control of the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer, and if the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the next process data. In this way, the reach performance G development suggestion performance can be executed during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the reach performance G notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the reach performance G development notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the variable display in these super reach ε and super reach θ variation patterns, the player is drawn to the attention of whether or not the reach performance G development suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the reach performance C or reach performance D, and this increases the interest in the game.

Figure 11-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of Figure 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in Figure 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS340). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, it further determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS341).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS341; Y), the chance-up performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is not the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS341; N), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS342).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, Super Reach η, and Super Reach λ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS342; N), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach α or Super Reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS343). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach α or Super Reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS343; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance A and the performance pattern according to the variable display result (step 029 SGS344).

Here, the contents of reach performance A to reach performance I in this feature part 029SG will be explained based on Fig. 11-32(A) to Fig. 11-32(E). As shown in Fig. 11-32(A) to Fig. 11-32(I), reach performance A to reach performance I are each composed of a reach title display period in which the title of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5, followed by a battle performance execution period in which a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the image display device 5.

During the reach title display period of each of these reach effects A to I, the reach title can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see Figure 11-33 (A)).

In addition, for the battle performance execution period of reach performance A to reach performance D, a movable body operation possible period in which the movable body 32 can be operated and a cut-in image display possible period in which a cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 are provided in the first half of the battle performance execution period, and it is possible to execute the operation of the movable body 32 in the movable body operation possible period and the display of a cut-in image in the cut-in image display possible period as part of the chance-up performance (see FIG. 11-33 (A)).

In addition, for the battle performance periods of reach performance C and reach performance D, a period in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed is provided after the period in which the movable object can be operated and the period in which a cut-in image can be displayed.

In addition, with regard to the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, a movable body operation period is provided in the first half of the battle performance execution period, and an operation promotion image display period is provided in the second half of the battle performance execution period (near the end timing of the battle performance) during which an operation promotion image is displayed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A in order to notify the player of the variable display result in response to the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A on the image display device 5. Note that the operation promotion image display period is usually the period during which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature part 029SG, during the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, it is possible to execute the movement of the movable body during the movable body operable period and to display an image of the stick controller 31A during the operation prompting image display period as part of the chance-up performance (see FIG. 11-33 (B)).

Note that there is no movable object operable period, no cut-in image display period, and no operation prompting image display period for reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I. In other words, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I are reach performances in which the chance-up performance is never executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 in FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the chance up effect with a probability of 60%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern P with a probability of 35%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern Q with a probability of 5%, and to execute the chance up effect with pattern R with a probability of 0%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect determines not to execute the chance up effect with pattern P with a probability of 35%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern Q with a probability of 60%, and to execute the chance up effect with pattern R with a probability of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; N), it proceeds to step 029SGS347. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect A according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach α (step 029SGS347; N), the chance up performance determination process is terminated, and if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347; Y), the presence or absence of chance up performance during the execution of reach performance F and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(B), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect F is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance-up effect decision process is terminated (step 029SGS350).

In addition, if the change pattern of the variable display in step 029SGS343 is any of Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance B and the performance pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect B is being executed (step 029SGS352). If it has not decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect B is being executed (step 029SGS352; N), it proceeds to step 029SGS354. If it has decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect B is being executed (step 029SGS352; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect B according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance up performance determination process is terminated, and if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence or absence of chance up performance during the execution of Reach performance E and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(D), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 5% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 5% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 60% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 0% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect E is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance-up effect decision process is terminated (step 029SGS357).

In addition, if the variable display change pattern in the processing of step 029SGS342 is one of the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ change patterns (step 029SGS342; Y), the performance control CPU 120 further determines whether the variable display change pattern is one of the Super Reach γ and Super Reach ε change patterns (step 029SGS358).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS358; N), the chance-up performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the Super Reach γ or Super Reach ε fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS358; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the performance pattern, depending on the variable display result (step 029 SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(A), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect C, if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 5% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 5% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 60% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 0% of the time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-34(C), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect D, if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360). If it has not decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360; N), it ends the chance-up effect decision process, and if it has decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect C or reach effect D according to the variation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect decision process (step 029SGS361).

When it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the chance-up effect start waiting timer by 1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the chance-up effect start waiting timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect start waiting timer has timed out, a process table for the chance-up effect is selected, and the chance-up effect process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is decremented by 1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and a determination is made as to whether the chance-up effect process timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect process timer has not timed out, the effect control device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the chance-up effect process timer, and if the chance-up effect process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, a chance-up effect can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the number of times the chance-up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so that the player can pay attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed and whether or not the chance-up effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in reach effects such as reach effects A to D, which have a relatively low probability of winning, a maximum of three chance-up effects are executed, so that during the execution of reach effects A to D, the player can be effectively suggested that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of chance-up effects executed.

On the other hand, in reach effects with a high probability of winning, such as reach effects G to I, the chance-up effect can only be executed once during the reach effect, so that the interest in the reach effect with a high probability of winning is prevented from decreasing by executing the chance-up effect multiple times unnecessarily.

As shown in FIG. 11-34 (E), among the presentation patterns of the chance-up presentations in reach presentations A to D, pattern P is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red but the movable body 32 does not move and a cut-in image is not displayed, pattern Q is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 moves but a cut-in image is not displayed, and pattern R is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red, the movable body 32 moves, and the cut-in image is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (F), among the presentation patterns of the chance-up presentation in reach presentation E and reach presentation F, pattern S is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red but the movable body 32 is not moved and the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed, pattern Q is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 is moved but the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed, and pattern R is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red, the movable body 32 is moved, and the image of the stick controller 31A is all displayed.

As described above, as shown in Fig. 11-34(A) to Fig. 11-34(D), in the chance up performance of this feature part 029SG, when the chance up performance is not executed, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest for the chance up performances in reach performance A to reach performance D as a whole, and when the chance up performance is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is not executed. When the chance up performance is executed in pattern Q, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is executed in pattern P. And when the chance up performance is executed in pattern R, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is executed in pattern Q (jackpot expectation for chance up performances in reach performance A to reach performance D: pattern R > pattern Q > pattern P > non-execution).

In addition, for the chance up effects in reach effects E and reach effects F as a whole, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the chance up effect is not executed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be higher when the chance up effect is executed in pattern S than when the chance up effect is not executed. When the chance up effect is executed in pattern T, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up effect is executed in pattern S. And when the chance up effect is executed in pattern RU, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up effect is executed in pattern T (jackpot expectation for chance up effects in reach effects E and reach effects F: pattern U > pattern T > pattern S > not executed).

Comparing the cases where reach performance A to reach performance D are executed with the cases where reach performance E or reach performance F is executed, in reach performance A to reach performance D, pattern P and pattern Q are set as commonly executable performance patterns, while pattern R is executable only when reach performance B or reach performance D is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performances that can be executed in any of reach performance A to reach performance D, while the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 is a performance that can be executed only in reach performance B and reach performance D.

Furthermore, comparing the case where reach performance E is executed with the case where reach performance F is executed, in reach performance E and reach performance F, pattern S and pattern T are set as commonly executable performance patterns, while pattern U is executable only when reach performance F is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performances that can be executed in either reach performance E or reach performance F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation prompting image is a performance that can be executed only in reach performance F.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of the Super Reach in this feature part 029SG will be explained based on Fig. 11-35 to Fig. 11-56. First, a case where Reach presentation A is executed as the reach presentation of the Super Reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as not having increased by even one step. As shown in Fig. 11-35(A) to Fig. 11-35(D), when it is decided to execute the meter presentation at the start of the variable display (this feature part 029SG shows the case where execution of pattern D or pattern E is decided), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first and second timings before the reach and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in Figures 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when reach performance A starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance A and an expectation image 029SG251 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance A. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG161A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance A, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, a title image 029SG161B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance A.

When the display of the title image of reach effect A ends, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-35(G). Note that, even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step at the fourth timing, as shown in FIG. 11-36(H).

In addition, during the battle performance, if it is decided to execute a chance-up performance in the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position toward the performance position is executed as shown in FIG. 11-36 (I). Note that the movement of the movable body 32 as a chance-up performance is a movement from the origin position toward the performance position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at a position intermediate between the origin position and the performance position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K).

When the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach α Miss Variable Pattern (PA2-2), as shown in Figures 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A is defeated by enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), as shown in Figures 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A wins over enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach η variable display, as shown in Figures 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image display period, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step (up to five steps) and becomes full. Then, a caption image 029SG005T is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 to inform the player that the meter 029SG005M has increased to five steps (become full) and to inform the player that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (R), the battle presentation is interrupted midway, and instead of the battle presentation, the high expectation reach presentation development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation. Then, the reach presentation F is started. Details of the high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation will be described later in FIG. 11-55.

As shown in Figures 11-37 (S) and 11-37 (T), when reach performance F starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the reach performance F and an expectation image 029SG256 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance A. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG166A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance F, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern S, Pattern T, or Pattern U, a title image 029SG166B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance F.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect F ends, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character B begins, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (U). During the battle effect, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position toward the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (V) and FIG. 11-36 (W). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in Figures 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), an operation prompting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up performance has not been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, whereas if the execution of the chance-up performance has been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period for these operation means ends, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach η miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-8), as shown in Figures 11-39(a) and 11-39(b), the result of the battle performance is that ally character B is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach η jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in Figures 11-39(c) and 11-39(d), the result of the battle presentation is that ally character B wins over enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation F) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Next, we will explain the case where reach performance B is executed as the reach performance of the super reach. Note that the meter 029SG005M is displayed as not having increased by even one step at the start timing of the variable display. As shown in Figures 11-40(A) to 11-40(D), when it is decided to execute the meter performance at the start of the variable display (this feature part 029SG discloses the case where execution of pattern D or pattern E is decided), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, which is the timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in Figures 11-40 (E) and 11-40 (F), when reach performance B starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance B and an expectation image 029SG252 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance B. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG162A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance B, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, a title image 029SG162B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance B.

When the display of the title image of reach effect B ends, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G). Note that, even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step at the fourth timing, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (H).

In addition, during the battle presentation, if it is decided to execute a chance-up presentation in the presentation pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position to the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (I). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach β miss variable pattern (PA2-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character B is defeated by enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance B) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character B defeats enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation B) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ variable display, as shown in Figures 11-42 (P) and 11-42 (Q), after the end of the period in which the cut-in image can be displayed, friendly character B is defeated by enemy character A, and the player is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

After the battle performance (reach performance B) ends, a swinging display is performed with a combination that indicates a loss of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided that a reach performance E development suggestion performance will be performed, a reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so that the display position of the decorative symbols overlaps in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (R).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach δ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (S), after the reach performance E development suggestion performance execution period, the swinging of the decorative pattern stops and it is notified again that the variable display is a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ζ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (T), after the reach performance E development suggestion performance execution period, a reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed as a reach performance E development notification performance. Then, the reach performance E starts.

As shown in Figures 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach performance E starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance E and an expectation image 029SG255 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance E. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG165A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance E, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern S, Pattern T, or Pattern U, a title image 029SG165B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance E.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect E ends, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B begins, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (W). During the battle effect, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position toward the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (X) and FIG. 11-43 (Y). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in Fig. 11-43(Z), Fig. 11-43(a), and Fig. 11-43(b), an operation prompting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up performance has not been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, whereas if the execution of the chance-up performance has been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period for these operation means ends, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach ζ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-7), as shown in Figures 11-44(c) and 11-44(d), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance E) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ζ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in Figures 11-44(e) and 11-44(f), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character A defeats enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation E) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the presentation mode of the reach presentation E development suggestion presentation shown in Figure 11-42 (Q) to Figure 11-42 (T).

First, as shown in Fig. 11-45(A) to Fig. 11-45(B), when it has been decided to execute a reach performance E development suggestion effect, in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss, the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance E development suggestion effect. Note that the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be an image that is less visible to the player, such as having a lower brightness or fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols.

After the first display period of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends, as shown in Fig. 11-45(C) to Fig. 11-45(D), the display of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends once, and then the second display of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Note that the second-stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be an image that is more visible to the player than the first-stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170, such as being brighter or having more display colors than the first-stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), the display of the reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the reach performance E development notification performance, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-45(F), the reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the reach performance E development notification performance, and the reach performance E is executed.

Next, we will explain the case where reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach. Note that when reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, the meter performance is not executed, so the explanation of the period from the start of the variable display to the reach is omitted.

When reach performance C is executed, as shown in Fig. 11-46(A) to Fig. 11-46(C), when reach performance C starts, the title image of the reach performance C and the expectation image 029SG253 showing the expectation of a big win of the reach performance C are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, if the execution of the chance up performance has not been decided, the title image 029SG163A with the title letters in black is displayed as the title image of the reach performance C, whereas if the execution of the chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, the title image 029SG163B with the title letters in red is displayed as the title image of the reach performance C.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect C ends, a battle effect between ally character C and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C).

On the other hand, when reach performance D is executed, as shown in Fig. 11-46(D) to Fig. 11-46(F), when reach performance D is started, the title image of the reach performance D and the expectation image 029SG254 showing the expectation of a big win of the reach performance D are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, if the execution of the chance up performance has not been decided, the title image 029SG164A with the title letters in black is displayed as the title image of the reach performance D, while if the execution of the chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, the title image 029SG164B with the title letters in red is displayed as the title image of the reach performance D.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect D ends, a battle effect between ally character D and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (F).

In addition, during the battle effects of reach effects C or reach effects D, if it is decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position to the intermediate position, as shown in Figure 11-47 (G) and Figure 11-47 (H). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it is decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figure 11-47 (I) and Figure 11-47 (J).

Also, as shown in Figures 11-47 (K) to 11-47- (M), if it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed, after the period during which a cut-in image can be displayed during the battle effect of reach effect C or reach effect D, the image display device 5 will display, as a branch destination suggestion effect, one of the following images: a branch destination suggestion image X (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X) suggesting that both a reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) and a high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) will be executed; a branch destination suggestion image Y (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y) suggesting that a reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) will be executed; or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) suggesting that a high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) will be executed.

After the period when the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed, if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach γ miss variation pattern (PA2-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (N) to 11-48 (P), if reach effect C is being executed, the result of the battle effect is that ally character C is defeated by enemy character A, thereby informing the player that the variable display is a miss, and if reach effect D is being executed, the result of the battle effect is that ally character D is defeated by enemy character A, thereby informing the player that the variable display is a miss. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display in the Super Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S), when reach performance C is being executed, the variable display notifies the player that it is a jackpot as a result of the battle performance that ally character C wins over enemy character A, and when reach performance D is being executed, the variable display notifies the player that it is a jackpot as a result of the battle performance that ally character D wins over enemy character A. Then, after the battle performance (reach performance C or reach performance D) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ variable display, as shown in Figure 11-49 (T) to Figure 11-49 (V), after the end of the period in which the branch destination suggestion performance can be executed, friendly character C or friendly character D is defeated by enemy character A, and the user is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

After the battle performance (reach performance C or reach performance D) ends, a swinging display is performed with a combination that indicates a loss of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided that a reach performance G development suggestion performance will be performed, a reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so that its display position overlaps with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance G development suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (W).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ε variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (X), after the reach performance G development suggestion performance execution period, the swinging of the decorative pattern stops and it is notified again that the variable display is a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach θ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach performance G development suggestion performance execution period, the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed as a reach performance G development notification performance. Then, the reach performance G starts.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(Z), when a reach performance G starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG167 of the reach performance G and an expectation image 029SG257 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance G.

When the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G ends, as shown in Figures 11-50(a) and 11-50(b), a battle effect between ally character C and enemy character B begins. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the super reach θ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-9), as shown in Figures 11-50(c) and 11-50(d), the result of the battle effect is that ally character C is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7), as shown in Figures 11-50 (e) and 11-50 (f), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character C defeats enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation G) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the presentation mode of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation shown in Figure 11-49 (V) to Figure 11-49 (Y).

First, as shown in Fig. 11-54(A) to Fig. 11-54(B), when it has been decided to execute a reach performance G development suggestion effect, in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss, the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance G development suggestion effect. Note that the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 may be an image that is less visible to the player, such as having a lower brightness or fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols.

After the first display period of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends, as shown in Fig. 11-54(C) to Fig. 11-54(D), the display of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends once, and then the second stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Note that the second stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 may be an image that is more visible to the player than the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171, such as being brighter or having more display colors than the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), the display of the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the reach performance G development notification performance, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-54(F), the display of the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is executed as the reach performance G development notification performance.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach ι variable pattern or a Super Reach κ variable pattern, as shown in Figures 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h), after the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of Reach effect C or Reach effect D, a shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-effect (the shutter image 029SG006 is moved from the left and right of the display area toward the center of the display area), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

When the execution period of the pre-effect ends due to the passage of a predetermined period of time, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left and right as a premonition effect, and the image of character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to the retreat of the shutter image 029SG006.

When the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach ι variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-51(i), a reach performance H development notification image 029SG183 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach performance H development notification performance, and then a reach performance H is executed. When the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach κ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-51(j), a high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and then a reach performance I is executed. Details of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be described later in FIG. 11-55.

When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a variable display with a Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (k), when the reach performance H starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG168 of the reach performance H and the expectation image 029SG258 indicating the expectation of a jackpot for the reach performance H.

When the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach performance H ends, as shown in FIG. 11-52(l) and FIG. 11-52(m), a battle performance between ally character D and enemy character C begins. If the variable display change pattern is a super reach i miss change pattern (PA2-10), as shown in FIG. 11-52(n) and FIG. 11-52(o), the result of the battle performance is that ally character D is defeated by enemy character C, and the variable display result is notified that it is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in Figure 11-52 (p) and Figure 11-52 (q), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character D defeats enemy character C, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a variable display in the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, as shown in Fig. 11-53(r) to Fig. 11-53(s), when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG169 of the reach performance I and the expectation image 029SG259 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach performance I. At this time, the image display device 5 displays images of Characters A to C behind the title image 029SG169 and expectation image 029SG259 of the reach performance I, thereby creating a sense of exclusivity due to the fact that the reach performance I has a higher jackpot expectation than other Super Reach reach performances.

When the display of the title image 029SG169 of reach performance I ends, as shown in Figures 11-53(t) and 11-53(u), a battle performance begins between ally character A to ally character D and enemy character C. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach κ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-11), as shown in Figures 11-53(v) and 11-53(w), the result of the battle performance is that ally character A to ally character D are defeated by enemy character C, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in Figures 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly characters A to D defeat enemy character C, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the high expectation reach performance development notification effects shown in Figures 11-37 (R) to 11-37 (T) and Figures 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s).

First, as shown in Figures 11-55(A) to 11-55(B), when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts, a high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed. Furthermore, after the high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, a blackout performance is executed in which the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make it difficult to see the performance image displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the blackout effect, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see other effect images (such as the variable display images of decorative patterns and character images), and the brightness of the display screen itself is reduced, while the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is reduced compared to before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect was executed. Furthermore, the amount of light emitted by the various light-emitting means (e.g., LEDs, etc.) provided in the game area, movable body 32, glass door frame, and game machine frame 3 is reduced compared to before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect was executed, making it even more difficult to see other effect images (such as the variable display images of decorative patterns and character images).

After the blackout effect is executed, an image of character C is displayed as a pre-effect, as shown in FIG. 11-55(C). In the pre-effect, the lines spoken by character C are further displayed as text image 029SG007 in the display area of image display device 5, and the lines are output as audio information from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-55(D) and FIG. 11-55(E), a switching performance is executed after the first performance ends, and a second performance is executed after the first performance ends. As the switching performance, an image different from the image of character C displayed in the first performance is displayed. Note that, in this feature section 029SG, an example is shown in which only one image is displayed as the switching performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of images may be displayed as the switching performance. Note that, when any one of a plurality of images is displayed as the switching performance in this way, the proportion controlled to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on which image is displayed.

As mentioned above, in the latter stage performance, the lines spoken by the character are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as character image 029SG008, and the lines are output as audio information from speakers 8L, 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has fewer characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed in the former stage performance, but each character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see Figure 11-10).

As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), after the latter stage performance is completed, the movable body performance is executed. In this movable body performance, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position, which is located above the image display device 5, to a performance position overlapping with the approximate center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the performance position is moved back to the origin position by the drive of a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

After the movable body performance ends, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (G), a reach performance according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach η variation pattern, then a reach performance F; if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach κ variation pattern, then a reach performance I) is executed.

Next, the variable display in the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern will be described. As shown in Figures 11-56(A) to 11-56(D), in the variable display in the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern, first, when the variable display starts, the meter 029SG005M increases all at once to the fifth stage and becomes full at the second timing before the reach. Next, a caption image 029SG005T is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 to inform the player that the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth stage (becomes full) and to inform the player that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

Then, the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is executed without a reach occurring or any of the reach performances A to D being executed. The presentation mode of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is the same as the presentation mode described above in FIG. 11-55. After the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-53, reach performance I is executed and it is finally announced that the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set to be longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance, and the length L11 of the period from when the reach performance E development notification performance starts until the reach performance E is executed and the variable display result of the reach performance E is notified that it is a jackpot as a result of the performance of the reach performance E is set to be longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance. Since the length of time L12 until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the result of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set shorter than the length of time L13 from the start of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance until the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the result of the reach performance I, in the case where the reach performance E is executed after the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to an excessively long period until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot. Also, in the case where the reach performance I is executed after the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, it is possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the reach performance I until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot, thereby improving interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of reach performance B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of r-value performance A, so that the player can focus on reach performance B for a longer period than reach performance A, thereby increasing interest in the game. As shown in FIG. 11-7 to FIG. 11-9, unlike reach performance A, the reach performance B does not execute a development notification performance before the variable display result is notified as a performance result, so that even if the reach performance E development notification performance is not executed, it is possible to reliably draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result of the reach performance B will be notified that it is a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, while reach performance A or reach performance B is being executed, a meter performance may be executed as a performance suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, so that the execution of the meter performance can arouse the player's anticipation that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example is given of a form in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the meter effect, the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be suggested by the output mode of the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, a form in which the meter performance can be executed only when the reach performance A or the reach performance B is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance can also be executed when the reach performance C or the reach performance D is executed. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ in which the pre-performance and the premonition performance are executed from the middle of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and then the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed, a case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode that notifies the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance) in response to the pre-performance or the premonition performance. In this way, the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ can draw the player's attention to whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage during the execution of the pre-performance or the premonition performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at once at the second timing without going through the execution of reach performance A, and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed. Therefore, even if reach performance A is not executed, the player can be drawn to the fact that the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, this feature section 029SG illustrates an example in which the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are not executed when reach performance B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are executed after reach performance B is executed. By doing this, even when reach performance B is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, the meter 029SG005M is shown to increase by one step at each of the first to fifth timings as an example of the meter performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may increase by two or more steps at any timing. Furthermore, when the meter 029SG005M is increased by two or more steps at any of the first to fifth timings, the rate at which the meter 029SG005M progresses to reach performance I may differ between the case where the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth step before the start of reach performance A or reach performance B and the case where the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth step after the start of reach performance A or reach performance B. In addition, in this feature 029SG, the meter performance is exemplified as a form in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance may be such that the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed in four stages or less or six stages or more.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the period L13 from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is started until reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified of a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I is set to be longer than the length of the period L12 from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is started until reach performance F is executed and the variable display result is notified of a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. Therefore, by lengthening the period until the performance result is notified when reach performance I with a higher expectation of a jackpot is executed, the sense of expectation of being controlled in a jackpot game state can be effectively increased.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-23 to 11-25, the meter performance suggesting the execution of a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature part 029SG is a performance in which the display mode changes in stages over a maximum of five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter performance is not executed is included) from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-45, the reach performance E development suggestion performance suggesting the execution of reach performance E in this feature part 029SG is a performance in which the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes over two stages. In other words, in this feature part 029SG, as a meter performance, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can change up to five stages, but as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can only change up to two stages. For this reason, in meter effects, the image of the effect target (meter 029SG005M) is more likely to change to the fifth stage than in reach effect E development suggestion effects, so the player can pay attention to whether the meter 029SG005M will increase to the fifth stage, increasing interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages as a meter performance, while the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can only be changed up to two stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to five stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance. In this way, when the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to five stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, the rate at which the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes up to the fifth stage can be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth stage.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ and Super Reach ζ, the length L5 of the period during which the meter performance can be executed is set longer than the length L6a of the period during which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, so that it is possible to suggest for a longer period that a reach performance F with a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach performance A will be executed after the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed, compared to the execution of a reach performance E development notification performance being suggested, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, an example is given in which the length L5 of the period in which the meter performance can be executed is set to be longer than the length L6a of the period in which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length L5 of the period in which the meter performance can be executed may be set to be shorter than the length L6a of the period in which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed.

In addition, this characteristic part 029SG illustrates an example of a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when it is not determined that a meter performance is to be performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when it is determined that a meter performance is to be performed. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the timing of the first stage increase.

Furthermore, since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the result of the reach effect B, by executing the reach effect E development suggestion effect while the reach effect B is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the player realizing that the variable display result is not notified as a jackpot as the result of the reach effect B.

Note that in this feature part 029SG, the only pattern disclosed as a pattern for progressing from reach performance B to reach performance E is a pattern in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed after a variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance B (see FIG. 1-8 (F)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern for progressing from reach performance B to reach performance E may also be provided in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed before a variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance B. In this way, when providing a case in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed before a variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance B, a reach performance E development suggestion performance may be executed while the reach performance B is being executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-31 to 11-34, while reach effects A to F are being executed, chance up effects can be executed, and the probability of winning varies depending on which effect pattern the chance up effect is executed in.

In particular, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which reach performance F is executed after reach performance A, during the execution of reach performance A, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, whereas during the execution of reach performance F, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the image display of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image. For this reason, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, the number of times the performances constituting the chance-up performance are executed is increased during the execution of reach performance F compared to during the execution of reach performance A, which makes it possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the performance result of reach performance F.

Furthermore, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, in which reach performance E is executed after the execution of reach performance B, during the execution of reach performance B, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, whereas during the execution of reach performance E, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, as a chance-up performance. For this reason, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the number of performances constituting the chance-up performance are executed less frequently during the execution of reach performance E than during the execution of reach performance B, which prevents the player from paying excessive attention to the performance result of reach performance E, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, which executes reach performance E after the execution of reach performance B, during the execution of reach performance B, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, whereas during the execution of reach performance E, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, as the chance-up performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, which executes reach performance E after the execution of reach performance B, it is also possible to execute the same number of performances constituting the chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance B as during the execution of reach performance E.

In this characteristic section 029SG, examples of the effects constituting the chance-up effect include the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of an image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image, but the present invention is not limited to these. For example, the effects constituting the chance-up effect may include the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a specific pattern, the output of a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the illumination of the light guide plate, the display of a light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) on the image display device 5, the operation of the image display device 5 itself, etc.

In addition, in this characteristic section 029SG, examples of the effects that make up the chance-up effect include the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompt image, all of which are effects that are executed regardless of the player's operation (active effects). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects that make up the chance-up effect may include effects that are executed only when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A to change the light color of the game effect lamp 9 (the so-called back button) (active effects) that are executed only when the player operates the operation means.

As shown in Fig. 11-7 to Fig. 11-9 and Fig. 11-30, for the variable display of the variation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, the reach performance of the Super Reach to be executed can be determined from reach performance C and reach performance D, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach performance C. If the pre-performance and the premonition performance are executed and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the reach performance I is executed, and if the reach performance G development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the reach performance G, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance I, is executed.

Furthermore, before the variable display result is announced as the result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the pre-performance and premonition performances are executed, and when the reach performance H development announcement performance is executed, the reach performance H, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance I, is executed, so that the performances can be diversified by combining the types of reach performances and the development announcement performances.

In particular, for the variable display of the variation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, by determining whether to execute reach performance C or reach performance D at the ratios shown in Figures 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), the ratio of the reach performance I (high expectation reach performance development notification performance) being executed after the premonition performance is executed is set higher when the execution of reach performance C is decided than when the execution of reach performance D is decided, so that a predetermined relationship can be established between the executed reach performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, thereby increasing the interest in the reach performance and the development notification performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, in the variable display of the variable patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, an example is given of a form in which the reach performance to be executed can be determined from reach performance C and reach performance D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable pattern in which reach performance C is executed during the variable display and a variable pattern in which reach performance D is executed during the variable display may be provided separately.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined at different rates depending on the variable display result. In other words, the example shows a form in which the chance-up effect is executed as an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the effect result of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect that can be executed during the effect period of reach effect A to reach effect D may be executed as an effect that suggests that any of reach effect E to reach effect I will be executed (developing into any of reach effect E to reach effect I).

Furthermore, as a chance-up effect, in addition to the variable display result being a jackpot and one of reach effects E to I being executed, it may also be possible to indicate that the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the variable display result is a jackpot will be 10 rounds, that the game will be controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the case where a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed after a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed, and in the case where a reach performance H development notification performance is executed after a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed, a common pre-performance can be executed in the period between the reach performance C or the reach performance D and the development notification performance. By executing the pre-performance, the player's attention to the development notification performance can be increased, while the player's attention can be drawn to whether the high expectation reach performance development notification performance or the reach performance H development notification performance will be executed as the development notification performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figures 11-27 to 11-28, during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, it is possible to execute a branch destination suggestion effect that suggests whether a reach performance H development announcement effect or a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect will be executed after the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and that can suggest the execution of both a reach performance H development announcement effect and a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect. Therefore, by executing the development destination suggestion effect, the player's attention can be increased to the execution of the development announcement effect, while the player's attention can be drawn to whether a reach performance H development announcement effect or a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, an example has been given of a form in which it is possible to suggest that a reach performance H development notification performance will be executed and that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed as a development suggestion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to suggest that a reach performance G development notification performance will be executed as a development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example is given of a form in which a development suggestion effect can be executed by a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect C or reach effect C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a development suggestion effect can also be executed by a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect A or a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect B.

As shown in FIG. 11-30(D), for the variation pattern of Super Reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance development notification effect and a reach performance I are executed before the performance result is notified as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, and the variation pattern of Super Reach θ in which a reach performance G development notification effect and a reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variable display of the Super Reach κ is 6. 0%, whereas the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed is 40%, so depending on whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, it becomes possible to guess whether reach performance I is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach κ, or whether reach performance H is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach θ, and therefore it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, for the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern is set to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a miss, the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern may be set to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, the characteristic part 029SG exemplifies a form in which a first pending memory display area 029SG005D and a second pending memory display area 029SG005U are provided at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which are capable of displaying a pending memory display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-1, as shown in FIG. 11-57, an active display area 029SG005F may be provided at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, the center of the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5) in which a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed can be displayed as an active display.

In addition, when the active display can be displayed in this manner, multiple display modes of the active display can be provided, as in the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, and an active display performance can be executed in which the probability of winning varies depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in. For example, three types of display modes for the active display can be provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the highest probability of winning can be set when the active display is displayed in a red circle display mode, and the lowest probability of winning can be set when the active display is displayed in a white circle display mode (potential of winning for display modes of the active display: red > blue > white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display may be changed from a white or blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the change in the display mode of the active display to a red circle may indicate an increase in the likelihood of a jackpot for the variable display being executed.

In this way, when the display mode of the active display can be changed during the variable display, as shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B), for the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, in which the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B and then reach performance E is executed, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance E is set to P1.

In addition, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which a high expectation reach development notification display is executed during the execution of reach performance A and then reach performance F is executed, the rate at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A is P2, and the rate at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance F is P3.

In this case, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance F is being executed, may be set higher than P1, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance E is being executed, or P2, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance A is being executed.

In this way, when a variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach η (when reach performance A is executed and then reach performance F is executed), the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before the start of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, reducing the risk of the player realizing in advance that reach performance F will be executed. Also, when reach performance E is executed and when reach performance F is executed, the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle at a higher rate in reach performance F, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach performance E, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed to a red circle appropriately according to the expectation of a jackpot, improving interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η, the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach performance F is higher than the rate P2 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach performance A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 029SG-2, in the same manner as the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η, during the execution of the reach performance F, The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle may be set higher than the rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A, and the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance E in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ may be set higher than the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance B.

In this way, by providing multiple modes as the active display mode and varying the likelihood of a jackpot depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the likelihood of a jackpot, and by changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle before the execution of the reach performance E development notification performance or the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, it is possible to reduce the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player perceiving in advance that the likelihood of a jackpot is high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, a variation pattern of the super reach λ is provided in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed and reach performance I is executed without going through reach performances such as reach performance A and reach performance B. As a modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach performance I may be set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach performance I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the execution of reach performance I, it is possible to make the player more aware in advance that reach performance I will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the Super Reach λ variation pattern, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the Reach performance I is set to be higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I is set to be higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I is set to be lower than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the Reach performance I is executed without going through another Reach performance even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle, which gives the game an element of surprise and increases the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG and the modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, three types of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. The expected probability of a jackpot is different depending on which display mode the reserved memory display and active display are displayed in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display may be only two types or four or more types.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, examples have been given in which the display mode of the active display can be changed while a reach performance is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of the change in the active display mode may include timing other than while a reach performance is being executed, for example, while a development suggestion performance or development notification performance is being executed, or the start timing of the variable display. Furthermore, if it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance that includes a temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern during the variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changed at the timing of the temporary stop or re-variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, three types of display forms for the reserved memory display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. An example is given of a form in which the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on which display form the reserved memory display is displayed in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-4, in addition to a circle, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. may be provided as the display form for the reserved memory table display, and it may be possible to suggest which of the reach effects E, F, G, H, or I the reserved memory display will develop into depending on which shape it is displayed in. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value judgment process and judges that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) is a super reach, it further judges which of the Super Reach α to Super Reach λ the Super Reach fluctuation pattern is (which of Reach performance A to Reach performance I will execute during the variable display), and transmits a Super Reach fluctuation category command (a fluctuation category command including information on which Super Reach fluctuation pattern will be executed) according to the judgment to the performance control board 12. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the display mode of the reserved memory table display from a circle, triangle, square, star, etc. based on the Super Reach fluctuation category command received from the CPU 103. Also, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the reserved memory display before the variable display begins, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, an example is given in which the shape of the reserved memory display can suggest a reach performance that will develop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the reserved memory display can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, and the shape of the reserved memory display can further suggest a reach performance that will develop into a draw. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and shape of the reserved memory display, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the shape of the pending memory display can suggest a future reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach performances that can suggest a future reach performance based on the shape of the pending memory display may be only some of reach performance E, reach performance F, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I (for example, only reach performance E and reach performance I).

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of the reach effects A to F, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-5, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black can be changed to red halfway through. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red halfway through as a chance-up effect in this way, the display mode of the expectation image showing the expectation of a jackpot displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example, the number of stars displayed as the expectation image can be increased). In this way, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the color of the characters of the reach title image changes from black to red, so that attention to the expectation image can be increased, and the player can be made to accurately recognize the expectation of the reach effect to be executed.

In addition, in the feature part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach κ, an example is given in which the presence or absence of a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined at the same rate when the reach presentation of the super reach to be executed is reach presentation C and when it is reach presentation D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach κ, the presence or absence of a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined at different rates when the reach presentation of the super reach to be executed is reach presentation C and when it is reach presentation D.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-59 as modified example 029SG-6, in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance is executed before the variable display result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D during execution of the reach performance C or reach performance D, if the reach performance to be executed is determined to be reach performance C, a decision is made to not execute the branch destination suggestion performance 15% of the time, to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern X 30% of the time, to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern Y 20% of the time, and to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern Z 35% of the time. Also, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect D, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect pattern X is determined to be executed 30% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Y is determined to be executed 20% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z is determined to be executed 40% of the time.

In particular, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher (the decision rate of not executing the branch destination suggestion performance is set lower) than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to appropriately suggest that a development notification performance such as a reach performance H development notification performance or a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed while the variable display is being executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance may be set lower than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for branch destination suggestion performance pattern Z (a performance pattern suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance) is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to more appropriately suggest the execution of development notification performances such as the reach performance H development notification performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance during the execution of the variable display, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in variant example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance may be set lower than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, as shown in FIG. 11-59, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ, an example is given in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach presentation of the executed super reach is reach presentation C and reach presentation D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach presentation of the executed super reach is reach presentation C and reach presentation D for the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ and super reach ι.

Moreover, in this modified example 029SG-6, a form is exemplified in which a branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance C (first advantageous outcome suggestion effect in invention 033SG) and a branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance D (second advantageous outcome suggestion effect in invention 033SG) can be executed as effects of the same presentation type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance C and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance D can be executed as effects of different presentation types.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in Figs. 11-5 to 11-9, as for the notification mode in which the reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the reach performances E to I, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which one of these reach performances A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified is illustrated as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-7, as for the notification mode in which the reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the reach performances E to I, in addition to the first notification mode, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is notified as a miss as the performance result of the reach performance A to reach performance D and then the variable display result is notified as a jackpot again may be provided.

In this way, when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, the percentage of the branch destination suggestion performance being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be the same as the percentage of the branch destination suggestion performance being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In this way, by executing reach effects A to D as the reach effects of the super reach, and providing a second notification mode as a notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach effects E to I, the player can be surprised by being notified that the variable display result is a jackpot even though it was initially notified that the variable display result was a miss. Furthermore, because the process for deciding to execute the branch destination suggestion effect can be made common between when the performance result (variable display result) of executing reach effects C and reach effects D is notified in the first notification mode and when it is notified in the second notification mode, the amount of data required for this process can be reduced.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-7, when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, an example is given in which the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, the percentage of the branch destination suggestion effect being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be different from the percentage of the branch destination suggestion effect being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the modified example 029SG-7, as for the notification mode in which reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, a first notification mode in which any of these reach performances A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and a second notification mode in which the variable display result is notified as a miss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then the variable display result is notified as a jackpot, are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 029SG-8, a form is exemplified in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed and the variable display result is notified. is executed, and after it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance C or reach performance D is a miss, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance G is a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot (PB1-7)), the rate at which the chance up performance is executed during the variable display in the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot may be different from the rate at which the chance up performance is executed in the variable display where the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode. In this way, when the reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, the execution rate of the chance up performance can be made different depending on whether the reach performance G is executed before it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the percentage at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the percentage at which the chance up effect is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot may be the same as the percentage at which the chance up effect is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-27, a branch destination suggestion effect can be executed in a plurality of presentation patterns, and a form is exemplified in which the rate at which a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect is executed varies depending on which presentation pattern is used to execute the branch destination suggestion effect. In particular, in the characteristic part 029SG, a form in which a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in presentation pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect is executed with the highest rate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in presentation pattern Z, a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect may be executed with an extremely high rate (for example, 99%).

In particular, in the case where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed with an extremely high probability when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in performance pattern Z, a case where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in performance pattern Z, or a case where a reach performance I is executed even though a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is not executed (a so-called performance contradiction pattern) may be set. Note that, when such a performance contradiction pattern is set, a branch destination suggestion performance or a reach performance I in the performance contradiction pattern is executed only when the variable display result is notified as a jackpot, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise, and when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z or when a reach performance I is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ in which the variable display result (miss) is notified as the result of the reach performance C or reach performance D, and then the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, the execution decision ratio of the reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of the reach performance D are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ, the execution decision ratio of the reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of the reach performance D may be the same. In this way, in both the case where the reach performance C is executed and the case where the reach performance D is executed, the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, an embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are the same is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both cases in which reach performance C is executed and in which reach performance D is executed, as long as it is possible to achieve an effect in which the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D is about 1% to 5%, i.e., the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are approximately the same).

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ in which the variable display result (miss) is notified as the result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and then the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, the expectation of a jackpot when the execution of the reach performance C is decided is smaller than the expectation of a jackpot when the execution of the reach performance D is decided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ, the expectation of a jackpot when the execution of the reach performance C is decided and the expectation of a jackpot when the execution of the reach performance D is decided may be the same. In this way, in both the case where the reach performance C is executed and the case where the reach performance is executed, when the reach performance G development notification performance is executed, the player can expect that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the result of the performance of the reach performance G, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided and the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both the cases where the reach performance C is executed and the reach performance is executed, when the reach performance G development notification performance is executed, as long as it is possible to produce an effect that the player can expect that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance G, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D are approximately the same).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, in the characteristic part 029SG, it is possible to execute the display of the reach title in red, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of an image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, and an example has been given of a form in which the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed as a common effect in reach effects A to D that are executed before the reach effect E development announcement effect and the high expectation reach effect development announcement effect, and in reach effects E and reach effects F that are executed before the reach effect E development announcement effect and the high expectation reach effect development announcement effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-12, the expectation of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F. This makes it possible to limit the increase in the number of effects that can be executed as chance-up effects (the number of effect patterns for chance-up effects), while drawing the player's attention to which reach effect the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are being executed during, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, an example is given in which the presence or absence of a chance up effect and the presentation pattern of the chance up effect can be determined at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of a chance up effect and the presentation pattern of the chance up effect can be determined at different rates depending on whether any of reach effects E to I is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modified example 029SG-13, for the variation pattern of Super Reach κ in which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed before the variable display result (miss) is announced as the performance result of Reach performance C or Reach performance D, it may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance up performance at different rates when the execution of Reach performance C is decided and when the execution of Reach performance D is decided. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of Super Reach κ, when the execution of Reach performance D is decided, the execution of the chance up performance is decided at a higher rate than when the execution of Reach performance C is decided, so that when the execution of Reach performance D is decided, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-7, a form was exemplified in which a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) is provided in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss as a result of the reach effects A to D, and then the variable display result is once notified that it is a jackpot. However, as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. 11-61(A) as modified example 029SG-14, a revival mode may be executed in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss and then notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot between the timing when the variable display stops.

In particular, in the case where the revival performance is executed after the variable display result of reach performance A to reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss (when the variable display is executed in any one of the variable patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, and Super Reach γ to result in a jackpot), as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is set to the start time of the reach performance E development suggestion performance when the variable display result of reach performance B is notified that the variable display result is a miss and then the reach performance E development notification performance, or reach performance E is executed (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of Super Reach ζ). By setting it shorter than the length of the period L22 from the start of the reaching performance E to the end of the reaching performance E (the variable display result notification timing), or the length of the period L23 from the start of the reaching performance G development suggestion effect to the end of the reaching performance G (the variable display result notification timing) when the reaching performance G development suggestion effect, the reaching performance G development notification effect, or the reaching performance G is executed after the variable display result of the reaching performance C or the reaching performance D is notified that it is a miss (when the variable display is executed with the variable display pattern of the super reach θ), it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance becoming redundant (L22>L21, L23>21).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-61(A) to 11-61(C), by setting the length L21 of the presentation period of the revival presentation to be shorter than the length L32 of the period from the start timing of the reach presentation E development suggestion presentation to the end timing of the reach presentation E development notification presentation, or the length L33 of the period from the start timing of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation to the end timing of the reach presentation G development notification presentation, it is possible to add a sense of surprise to the announcement that the variable display result is a miss.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-14, a form in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss as a result of the performance of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then a revival performance is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival performance may also be executed when a high expectation reach performance development notification performance or reach performance F is executed during the execution of reach performance A (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach η and a jackpot is obtained), when a pre-performance, a precursor performance, a reach performance H development notification performance, or a reach performance H is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach ι and a jackpot is obtained), or when a pre-performance, a precursor performance, a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, or a reach performance I is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach κ and a jackpot is obtained).

As shown in the characteristic part 029SG, the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed (the probability of a jackpot being expected) is set lower than the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance F, reach performance G, or reach performance I are executed, so that in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, the probability of a revival performance being executed after the variable display result of reach performance A to reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss can be set higher than the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance F, reach performance G, or reach performance I is executed, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the revival performance being executed even when reach performance A to reach performance D is executed and the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result of the reach performance B is once notified that it is a miss as a performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development suggestion performance, the reach performance E development notification performance, and the reach performance E are executed to result in a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ to result in a jackpot), or when the variable display result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is once notified that it is a miss as a performance result, then the reach performance G development suggestion performance, the reach performance G development notification performance, and the reach performance G are executed to result in a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach θ to result in a jackpot), a revival performance may be executed, but in these cases of the super reach ζ and the super reach When the variable display is executed in the θ variation pattern, it is notified once before the revival performance that the variable display result will be a miss. Therefore, in order to prevent the presentation from becoming redundant and reducing interest in the game due to the variable display result of the reach performance being notified twice or more, the revival performance may not be executed when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach ζ or Super Reach θ variation pattern and a jackpot is reached, or the revival performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach α to Super Reach γ, Super Reach η, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ variation pattern and a jackpot is reached.

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, an example was given of a form in which the time-saving state can be controlled after the end of a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state can also be controlled when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number (e.g., 900 times), or when the variable display result is a miss, the time-saving state can also be controlled when a partial miss is derived and displayed.

In particular, in the case of controlling the time-saving state in response to the number of times the variable display is executed reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time-saving state in response to the derivation display of some losses, a high-expectation reach performance development notification effect shown in the characteristic part 029SG or a notification effect that notifies the player that the time-saving state will be controlled after the revival effect shown in the modified example 029SG-14 is executed may be executed. In this way, in the case of controlling the time-saving state in response to the number of times the variable display is executed reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time-saving state in response to the derivation display of some losses, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the time-saving state will be controlled by executing a high-expectation reach performance development notification effect or a revival effect, whether a notification that the variable display result is a jackpot will be announced, or whether a high-expectation reach performance such as reach performance I will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as characteristic part 029SG, a form in which both invention 029SG and invention 033SG are implemented is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to implement only one of invention 029SG and invention 033SG.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect A), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), a third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and a fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion in which a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be reached as a performance result of the second suggestive performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion in which a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of reach effect A, and then a reach effect F is executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the reach performance E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
The duration of the second suggestive effect is longer than the duration of the first suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A).
moreover,
An operation means that can be operated by a player (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.);
a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation unit performance pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display performance control pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a light-emitting effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (e.g., lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 with a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern) that causes the operation unit to emit light in response to the predetermined vibration performance;
and a specific effect execution means (e.g., an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute specific effects (e.g., the reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game,
The rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot according to the operation unit performance pattern, etc.), and the rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the use of the operation unit performance pattern, etc.).
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in conjunction with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and an example of the gaming machine is one in which the vibration patterns for the specified vibration effect and the special vibration effect are different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 which are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestive effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and in the case where the special suggestive effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special suggestive effect before it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving interest in the game.Furthermore, it is possible to improve interest in the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

In other words, it is possible to prevent the period until control to an advantageous state is notified from being excessively long, and the length of the presentation period and the period from when the development presentation is executed until control to an advantageous state is notified vary depending on the type of development presentation, and the development presentation and notification of control to an advantageous state are executed in a presentation period of appropriate length depending on the type of development presentation, which increases interest in the game and allows players to focus on the light emission mode that has a high probability of controlling a specific vibration presentation to an advantageous state, whether it is executed at the timing of the vibration presentation execution, and whether a special vibration presentation is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific presentation. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest in the game and easily attract the interest of players when installed in an amusement facility.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that draws attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect to increase the interest in the game,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
An operation means that can be operated by a player (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.);
a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation unit performance pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display performance control pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a light-emitting effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (e.g., lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 with a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern) that causes the operation unit to emit light in response to the predetermined vibration performance;
and a specific effect execution means (e.g., an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute specific effects (e.g., the reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game,
The rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot according to the operation unit performance pattern, etc.), and the rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the use of the operation unit performance pattern, etc.).
The vibration effect execution means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of vibration effects in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the vibration patterns of the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect are different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)

Figure 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of step S27 after the special pattern process is completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 13 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 13 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 13 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 14, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, a process is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S90174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of this invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing this invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing this invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the features related to the setting suggestion production)
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a characteristic feature relating to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this characteristic feature, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate can be executed while the variable display is being executed.

Figure 15-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting processing, a stop pattern determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop pattern determination processing, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns, such as the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns, is determined. Following the stop pattern determination processing, a preview performance determination processing is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination processing makes it possible to determine the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special chart change performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling the execution of various performances. For example, one of the multiple prepared special chart change performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command. Also, one of the multiple prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. Note that the special chart change performance control pattern and the preview performance control pattern are not limited to being set as separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings for each performance may be set.

When the performance control pattern is determined in step S203, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example (step S204). Also, settings are made to start the variation of the decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control section 123, and the variation of the decorative patterns can be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (consumed), and the pending displays in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4", etc. are moved (shifted) one by one to the left. This shifts the pending display. In the active display part provided on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display corresponding to the pending display erased (consumed) in the pending display area may be performed. Note that when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second start winning, the setting for updating the active display in the active display area may be performed without updating the pending display. After that, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 15-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stopping symbol determination process. In the stopping symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed (step S221). Whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the reach performance of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop pattern in the case of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop pattern determination process is terminated. In the case of non-reach, the variable display result is "miss". In the case of normal reach, the variable display result includes the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" and the case where the variable display result is "miss". In the case of non-reach, where the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not a reach state, the final stop pattern is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination. The final stop pattern in the case of non-reach is determined to be different (mismatched) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In the case of normal reach, where the variable display result is "miss", the final stop pattern in the case of reach miss is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a missed reach is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In the event of a normal reach where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is the confirmed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop pattern at the time of the super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of the super reach, the variable display result may be either a "jackpot" or a "miss." At the time of the super reach where the variable display result is a "miss," the final stop pattern at the time of the reach miss is the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. At the time of the jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot.

During a super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed as fixed decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such a reach miss combination or a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbols that can be determined as reach symbols may include multiple types of decorative symbols, such as seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers may be only performance images showing the numbers, or may be performance images showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol may be determined as one of multiple decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols that become the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol decreases as the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are reached, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the lowest. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol increases as the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are reached, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the highest. In such a determination ratio setting, when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and as the numbers 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are displayed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state decreases, and when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "jackpot", the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be the same. The number of judgment values assigned to each decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be different, or the number of judgment values assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern. The determination ratio of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop pattern determination process is terminated. If the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (step S225). The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, or "effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the result of the determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226). If "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is not executed (step S226; No), the process of determining the symbols to be stopped is terminated. If "effect" has been determined (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and stores the notified setting value in a specified area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 is identified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and the stopping symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122.

Figure 15-3 shows an example of a setting for the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in ROM 121, table data constituting the decision table TA01 shown in Figure 15-3 is prestored as the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the decision table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "presentation" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "miss". With such a determination ratio setting, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot."

Figure 15-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as multiple setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed, and the display color when it is changed. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color red. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, and suggests that the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, and suggests that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is high. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests that the setting value is determined to be 6, which is the highest setting value. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on whether the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

Figure 15-4 (B) shows an example of settings for a setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in Figure 15-4 (B) is pre-stored in ROM 121 as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stopping symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by, for example, referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are portions where the number of judgment values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion effect using a reach pattern is executed, the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so there is a high probability of control to a jackpot game state. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is high, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, the reach pattern when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode includes a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, and a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, and suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In the case where the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed to continue giving a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state and also giving a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion presentation can be executed so that the presentation mode differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, and the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to copper, or not, differs. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, and the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6, whether the symbol display color is changed to gold, or not, differs.

Instead of or in addition to changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect may be to change any aspect of the reach state, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol. Alternatively, it may be to change the performance mode by any performance device, such as displaying a background image, an outer frame image, or any other performance image, outputting sound from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up decorative light-emitting bodies such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operating performance movable members, or a combination of some or all of these. The setting suggestion effect and other optional performances in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executable when any data related to performance control, any data not related to performance control, or a combination of these satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions previously determined for performance execution. A performance that changes the symbol display color is also called a change performance.

The multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and patterns that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 may be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is a "miss," whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is a "jackpot," and cannot be determined when the variable display result is a "miss." In this case, pattern RE-2 may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 may be determined at a different rate depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figure 15-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing as the variable display performance processing. In the variable display performance processing, it is determined whether or not the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various performances as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting processing. These commands are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. This allows a variety of effects to be produced by a given performance device, such as displaying a given performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting a given sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, off or blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable components for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step S242). If it is the advance notice performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the advance notice performance (step S243). If it is not the advance notice performance period (step S242; No) or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach performance period (step S244). If it is the reach performance period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach performance (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the reach performance is executed after the pattern display color is changed, it is possible to provide suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to provide suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1.

If it is not the reach performance period (step S244; No) or after the control of step S245 has been performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be determined in advance as a performance execution period in which the pattern display color is changed when a setting suggestion performance using a reach pattern is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No) or after the control of step S247 has been performed, control is performed to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, and then the variable display performance processing ends.

The change performance period may be set to a different time length depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change performance period may be set to the shortest first period, in the case of pattern RE-1, the change performance period may be set to the second period longer than the first period, in the case of pattern RE-2, the change performance period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change performance period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when a performance that notifies an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player tends to take an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player and post it on a member registration website such as a social networking service (SNS) or an Internet video supply site. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous performance is short, a problem occurs in that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a performance (unfavorable performance) that is often performed even in unfavorable cases, there is a problem that a long execution period of the unfavorable performance gives a player a sense of discomfort because it does not stimulate the desire to take a photo. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to ensure time for shooting, and the execution period of unfavorable effects is shortened to reduce discomfort. This prevents the player from missing an advantageous effect when it is executed, and also ensures time for shooting. Furthermore, by ensuring time for shooting, the player can publish the captured images and videos on the Internet, which can increase public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in many cases, the images and videos are published, including which pachinko gaming machine 1 at which gaming parlor they were taken, which means that the gaming parlor is advertised by the player. In this way, by ensuring time for shooting when a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only for the player but also for the gaming parlor.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the pattern determination command has not been received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is terminated and the device waits. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error process may be executed in response to the fact that the pattern determination command could not be received normally. If a pattern determination command has been received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern (step S250). Next, a certain time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start command (step S251). In addition, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S252), and then the variable display performance process is terminated.

Figure 15-6 shows an example of the execution of a setting suggestion effect. Figure 15-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. When a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, a reach is established and a normal reach reach effect is executed. Figure 15-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which a normal reach reach effect transitions to a super reach reach effect and a reach development occurs. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size, and a performance image in the super reach reach effect is displayed. Figure 15-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. A performance display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the reach symbol that is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, a performance image announcing a message such as "Change in symbol display color!!" is displayed, suggesting a change in the symbol display color.

Figure 15-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color. Figure 15-6 (D2) shows a performance execution example HD112 in which the pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper. Figure 15-6 (D3) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver. Figure 15-6 (D4) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold. In performance execution example HD111, the pattern RE-0 does not change the display color of the reach symbol, and it remains the normal display color red. In this way, a failure performance (false performance) in which the symbol display color does not change is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. In performance execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the reach symbol to copper, suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 2 or higher. In performance execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the reach symbol to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a favorable set value. In performance execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the reach symbol to gold, suggesting that the highest set value, 6, has been confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect may be an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect or a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot and also suggests the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an effect that can make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then continued, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then ended, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while continuing, or a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination rates depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, a suggestion is made in the presentation mode of a pattern that is determined with a high probability, thereby diversifying the presentation and increasing interest in the game so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state may be made, but no suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made in conjunction with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) or the performance during the jackpot (such as the performance corresponding to the first round or second round). There may also be cases where suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are made without making any suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

(Description of characteristic portion 10SH)
Next, a characteristic feature 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH has an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 has a push button 31B that the player can press to give a specific command.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a gaze guidance effect execution means capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 10SH has a higher expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a higher reliability of winning when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means of feature section 10SH can execute a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at either of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts and timing T2 when a reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether it is either timing T1 or timing T2, or either timing T3 or timing T4.

The visual line guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH does not execute visual line guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute visual line guidance effect at timing T1 and timing T2.

The visual guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to characteristic unit 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from a vibration effect and a gaze guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach effect of a super reach.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is provided with a display means for displaying information. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 for displaying various performance images.

The display of the visual guidance effect related to characteristic part 10SH has a lower priority than the display of specified information, and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information. For example, the visual guidance effect image has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 16-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH, and shows the layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent material, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. With this configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

The push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate when driven by a vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is configured, for example, as an eccentric motor in which a weight with an offset center of gravity is attached to the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to provide a variety of vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L, 9R for game effects are provided at specific positions on the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided to the left of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided to the right of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L, 9R have multiple LEDs built in along the extension direction of the game effect lamps 9L, 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 16-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, turning on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lamps to be turned on/off. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits that drive the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
16-3 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 10SH. The performance control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 16-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display to be executed and the display result of the variable display to be executed (step 10SHS1). The fluctuation pattern and display result are identified by the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when the variable display starts and analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to a combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, lottery refers to a method of determination using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The random number value uses one of the performance random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random number update process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). A vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect that is not linked to a preview effect. In the processing of step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect by drawing lots using random number values and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121.

In the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the decision value to be compared with the random number value should be assigned to the decision result of whether or not a vibration effect is to be performed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is to be performed, so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is performed than when the vibration effect is not performed, and the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is performed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is calculated, for example, as follows: (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") / {(probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is not a "jackpot")}.

Therefore, the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2 only needs to specify the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot" and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot" so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect will be a predetermined value.

(Vibration effects and jackpot reliability)
16-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a plurality of types of vibration effects, which are execution patterns SE1 to SE10, according to a combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, or timing T2 when a reach is achieved. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved. Also, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. Also, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. The performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as vibration effects at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, which can increase excitement.

In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, regardless of whether it is timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, or timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors, regardless of when the vibration effect can be executed. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors.

In this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. Also, in this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot for the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result definitively indicates that a jackpot has been displayed.

This configuration allows the user to focus on the color of the light emitted by the push button 31B when it vibrates, and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the timing of execution of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts than when it is executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. Also, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed than when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts.

This configuration can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. Also, if the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a specified reach state when no vibration effect is executed at timing T1, it can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, rather than at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed. And, when a vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, it can further heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of normal reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the Super Reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of Super Reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of Super Reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the Super Reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of Super Reach reach performance.

With this configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed can be used as a chance-up effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is always vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors, and the display result is definitively notified that it is a "jackpot."

This configuration can heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, rather than timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. And when the vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it can further heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In this way, in this embodiment, the sense of expectation for the vibration effect to be executed can be changed in a complex manner as the display of the decorative patterns progresses.

In addition, by setting the probability of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to a sufficiently low probability compared to the probability of executing other vibration effects, it is possible to increase the excitement when it is definitively notified that the display result is a "jackpot."

In addition, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated to produce a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always illuminated.

This configuration allows the user to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, increasing the chances that the user will recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 16-3, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation then determines, based on the result of the determination made in step 10SHS2, whether or not to execute a vibration presentation at either timing T3 when the normal reach presentation is being executed, or timing T4 when the super reach presentation is being executed in the current variable display (step 10SHS3).

When a vibration effect is to be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach effect (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect (step 10SHS4). An eye-guiding effect is an effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect by drawing lots using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121. In the table referenced in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio for the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect is set regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect at the same ratio regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed this time.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, a gaze guidance effect can be executed.

This configuration allows the push button 31B to be noticed before the vibration effect is executed, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

On the other hand, if a vibration effect is executed at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the gaze guidance effect is not executed.

When the display result is derived and displayed, a "miss" display result may be displayed, and then a rescue effect may be executed, causing the true display result to be derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and the current variable display has started, if a gaze guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, this may give the wrong impression that a rescue effect was executed in the previous variable display. In contrast, in this embodiment, a gaze guidance effect is not executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, thereby preventing such a misunderstanding.

In addition, if a visual guidance effect is executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state. In contrast, in this embodiment, a visual guidance effect is not executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, so that it is possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 16-3, if the vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 during the execution of the reach effect of the normal reach or timing T4 during the execution of the reach effect of the super reach (step 10SHS3; No), or after executing the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as reach effects, and the type of effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, and the type of effects to be executed by lottery. At this time, the lottery determination ratio is varied according to the current display result and the current fluctuation pattern, etc., thereby varying the reliability of the jackpot according to the execution of advance notice effects, etc., and the type of effects. Also, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern will be executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance that has been decided to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special chart fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern as the initial value for the performance control process timer, and stores in the timer value storage area of RAM 122 the performance specific data that specifies the type and mode of the performance that has been decided to be executed, and the execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the performance by comparing it with the timer value of the performance control process timer, in association with each other. If there are multiple performances that have been decided to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores the performance specific data and the execution timing specific timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start executing the variable display of the decorative pattern in the manner specified by the current variation pattern and which derives the determined final stop pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Then, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration and gaze guidance effects)
16-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and duration of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols starts or timing T2 when a reach is established. Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either timing T3 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed or timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

In addition, as described above, when the CPU 120 for controlling the effects executes a vibration effect at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a gaze guidance effect before that.

In this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T3 while a normal reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T3, and starts the vibration effect when timing T3 is reached. Similarly, in this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T4 while a super reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T4, and starts the vibration effect when timing T4 is reached. The presentation period for the gaze guidance effect in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the gaze guidance effect is being executed.

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Example of performance)
16-6 and 16-7 are diagrams showing examples of vibration effects and visual guidance effects. In these examples, an example of executing a vibration effect at timing T4 during the execution of a reach effect of a super reach will be described.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach reach performances. In the reach performance of a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A), a background image 10SHY of a "mountain view" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 starts the reach performance of the super reach, it displays the reduced decorative pattern that was stopped when the reach was achieved. In this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A), a "left" reach decorative pattern 10SH5L is displayed, which is a reduced decorative pattern that was stopped in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L when the reach was achieved, and a "right" reach decorative pattern 10SH5R is displayed, which is a reduced decorative pattern that was stopped in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R when the reach was achieved.

In addition, a small pattern display area 10SHK, which is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, is provided in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is also called the notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing the small pattern that is the notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing the confirmed small pattern that is the display result is derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decorative pattern is performed. During the period from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when the determined decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of the small pattern continues in a constant display mode and does not disappear from the screen or be blocked by an obstruction. Therefore, the small pattern display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always see the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 10SHK. The small pattern variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK is also called a constant small pattern or a small pattern for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a performance image showing a plurality of types of small patterns that are identifiable each other may be variably displayed as a notification information image in a display mode that is partially or entirely common to each of the plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern showing a number similar to the portion showing a number in the decorative pattern. The small symbols may be displayed only when the decorative symbols are not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A).

In addition, a fourth pattern may be provided following the special and decorative patterns, and the fourth pattern may be variable displayed in sync with the variable display of the special and decorative patterns. The variable display of the fourth pattern may be realized, for example, by continuing display control that repeatedly displays and hides a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth pattern display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth pattern, the display result in the variable display of the small patterns may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, to the right side of the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 16-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the variable display of the special symbol is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. In response to this, by performing a variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to display whether the variable display is in progress or whether the display result has been derived in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In this example, a pending display area 10SHH is displayed to display a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA is displayed to display an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. Note that when a reach performance of a super reach is being executed, the pending display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may be hidden.

In addition, a reserved number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similar to the reserved number display area 10SHH, the reserved number of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed in a specific manner. The display form is a form in which it is displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the gaze guidance presentation 4 seconds before timing T4 during the execution of the reach presentation of the super reach. As a gaze guidance presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a presentation that uses a visual presentation effect, for example, to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

In this example, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC that resembles a character holding a hammer, and a button image 10SHB that resembles a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (B).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character performs the action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 16-6 (B) to (D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside, in accordance with the character's action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 16-6 (B) to (D).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in Fig. 16-7 (E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside, in time with the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in Fig. 16-7 (E) and (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the appearance of the various images so that the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB and multiple star-like effect images 10SHS scatter from the button image 10SHB. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 starts a vibration performance, vibrating the push button 31B and lighting up the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Then, one second after timing T4, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the gaze guidance presentation, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration presentation has elapsed, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the vibration presentation, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and turns off the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Here, the push button 31B is located away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the play area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 16-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the state of the push button 31B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the push button 31B is vibrating or lit up. In response to this, by executing a gaze guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before it vibrates, and the vibration of the push button 31B can be appropriately recognized, sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

The priority of the display of the visual guidance effects is set lower than that of the constant small symbols and the reserved number display. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the visual guidance effects in a layer behind the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the reserved number display.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the constant small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the constant small pattern.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the reserved number display shown in the reserved number display area 10SHHS, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the reserved number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the eye guidance effects is set higher than the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative patterns. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the eye guidance effects in a layer that is closer to the front than the layers that display the background image and decorative patterns.

In this example, as shown in Figures 16-6 (B) to 16-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery," and it can be said that the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB, which are displays for guiding the viewer's gaze, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery."

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the character image 10SHC, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area 10SHH, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the reserved display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the active display.

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring optimal visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 16-6 (B) to 16-7 (G), when the visual guidance effect is being executed, the display of the visual guidance effect and the constant small pattern and the reserved number display, which have a higher priority than the display of the visual guidance effect, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display can be more optimally ensured at all times, while the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made more noticeable.

(Modification of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of this invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the processing of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 16-3, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect may be set according to which type of vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect at different ratios according to whether the current vibration effect is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Here, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red is executed. Also, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the gaze-guiding effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. With this configuration, the execution of the gaze-guiding effect can increase the expectation of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance may be capable of executing a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance. In this case, as a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance, multiple types of vibration performance may be executed according to a combination of the linked advance notice performance, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a feature advance notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed according to the operating state of the movable body 32. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a vibration performance linked with a highly reliable feature advance notice performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked feature advance notice performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be a performance that increases the chances of winning in the feature advance notice performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may also be capable of executing a vibration performance linked to other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration performance vibrates the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview performance, and causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 may be one in which the jackpot game state is started when the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole, after the determined decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination is derived. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the player of the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may also execute a vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and notifies the player that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B may be vibrated for three seconds and illuminated in rainbow colors to definitively announce that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is the highest number of rounds among the multiple options. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect linked to the round lottery effect.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing an error notification process. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, an error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5, or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 may display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing a gaze guidance performance. In that case, the display of the gaze guidance performance may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. With this configuration, even if a gaze guidance performance is executed when the error notification image is displayed, the visibility of the error notification image can be preferably ensured.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the gaze guidance effect is performed and when the gaze guidance effect is not performed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is performed than when the gaze guidance effect is not performed, it is possible to increase the interest when the gaze guidance effect is performed and the vibration effect is performed. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is not performed than when the gaze guidance effect is performed, it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating even if the gaze guidance effect is not performed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different before the reference timing and after the reference timing, with a certain timing as the reference. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before the timing T2 when the reach is established, and 3 seconds at the timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2, or at the timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2. In this way, the vibration time after the reference timing is longer than the vibration time before the reference timing. With this configuration, the performance effect when the vibration performance is executed after the reference timing can be improved.

The reliability of the vibration effect that will result in a big win may differ depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B. For example, the push button 31B may be vibrated with a first strength and a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and when the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength, the reliability of the vibration effect that will result in a big win may be higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the strength of the vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win may be the same for a first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and a second type of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first type. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win executed in the first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second type of pachinko gaming machine 1, respectively, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration effect may be executed as a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunities to execute the vibration effect.

In addition, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is the first mode and when it is the second mode. For example, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and when it is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect.

Alternatively, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be set to be only executable at any one of multiple timings at which a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress. For example, the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be executed only at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which a vibration effect as a look-ahead preview can be executed, it is possible to conveniently recognize that a vibration effect has been executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress.

When a vibration performance is executed as a pre-reading notice performance at a timing when a vibration performance can be executed as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed, the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance. For example, when a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continues to vibrate for a predetermined time, and the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. With this configuration, when a vibration effect can be executed as a pre-reading preview effect at a timing when a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, it is possible to easily recognize which vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability are common between a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type, the jackpot reliability may be common even if the mode of the vibration effect executed at the specific timing in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the mode of the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1. For example, even if the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed at the timing T2 when a reach is established in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is 100%. With this configuration, even if the type of pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B during the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect being executed at that time, for example, when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed. For example, when an announcement effect is executed to announce that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when the reach is achieved, the vibration effect is set to vibrate the push button 31B during the period when the image of the announcement effect is being displayed. With this configuration, even when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed for vibration effects of the same execution pattern. With this configuration, for example, when a vibration effect is executed as an effect to increase the chances of another effect, it is possible to flexibly adjust the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect while preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect can execute a provocative effect that encourages the development of a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability than the reach state after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination. After the provocative effect is executed, there are cases where the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability, and cases where the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss". When the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative success effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. On the other hand, when the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss", the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative failure effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. When executing such a provocation effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing when the provocation success effect is executed. This configuration can increase the interest when the provocation success effect is executed.

The vibration duration of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be adjusted to match the image of the teasing success effect. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the interest when the teasing success effect is executed.

The illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be the same as the illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. With this configuration, when the teasing success effect is executed, even if it develops into a reach state with a high jackpot reliability, the display result may be "miss," but it is possible to prevent the jackpot reliability from being excessively increased.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot," the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a vibration effect immediately before the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, is stopped. This configuration not only increases the interest in the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped, but also heightens the sense of anticipation for the vibration effect itself, and can increase interest when the vibration effect is executed at other times as well.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect can be "rainbow-colored" even when a "jackpot" occurs for a jackpot type other than the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different advantages for the player. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect becomes "rainbow-colored," it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a "jackpot" occurs for the jackpot type with the highest advantage.

If there are only two types of jackpots that provide players with different degrees of advantage, it is possible to avoid setting an execution pattern in which the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a jackpot of a type that provides a low degree of advantage to the player from occurring even if the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects, and thus prevents the player's expectations for the vibration effects from being diminished.

The presentation control CPU 120 may use an auditory presentation effect to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B as a visual guidance presentation. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may output a specific sound effect when a vibration presentation is being executed, and output the specific sound effect as a visual guidance presentation so that the volume gradually changes from a low volume to a high volume. With this configuration, a player who has difficulty recognizing visual guidance presentations that use visual presentation effects can be directed to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

When the configuration is such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the same execution pattern may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. For example, even when the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is "jackpot", the expectation of the highly advantageous setting value can be increased.

In the case where the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. With this configuration, the setting value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is any of "1" to "3" and when the setting value is any of "4" to "6". With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is a high setting that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player. Also, for example, the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is an odd number and when the setting value is an even number. With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is an even number that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player.

Even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. With this configuration, even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to draw attention not only to the fact that the vibration effect is being executed, but also to the state when the vibration effect is executed.

If it is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the reach is established. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is not executed at either the timing T1 or the timing T2, the combination of the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T1 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T2 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, even if the vibration effect that vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to glow in rainbow colors is not executed when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is achieved, and to further increase attention to the vibration effect at the timing T2.

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect. In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T3 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T4 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed, not only can the expectation of the vibration effect being executed at timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect be increased, but the attention to the vibration effect at timing T4 can be further increased.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is not definitely a "jackpot" is monotonous, whereas in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot", the push button 31B vibrates in accordance with a predetermined rhythm. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When a vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when a normal reach is being executed or at timing T4 when a super reach is being executed, a visual guidance effect may be executed without fail. With this configuration, the sense of expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of a reach effect can be appropriately increased by appropriately recognizing the vibration of the operating means.

When a vibration effect is executed at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started or the timing T2 when a reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at either the timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the execution pattern of the vibration effect executable at the timing T3 or the timing T4 may be restricted so that the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 are not inferior to the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2, in other words, so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 is not inferior to the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is restricted from being executed at timing T3, and the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is restricted from being executed at timing T4. With this configuration, when multiple vibration effects are executed in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the jackpot from decreasing.

When it is possible to execute a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the preview performance and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the preview performance may be different. For example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a reel preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the sound effect when the reel operates. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is illuminated in a color different from the illumination color of the push button 31B in a vibration effect not linked to a preview performance. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed, it is easy to recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to a preview performance or not.

It may be possible to execute a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the open present box, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (B), and a gaze-guiding effect may be executed. With this configuration, the execution of the present box effect may increase the sense of anticipation for the gaze-guiding effect and the vibration effect.

When an operation performance for operating the push button 31B can be executed, the push button 31B may be lit in this operation performance during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In this case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the lighting manner of the push button 31B in the vibration performance. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for vibration performance in which the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in red for 3 seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for button operation suggestion in which the push button 31B is switched between red illumination (illumination) and non-illumination (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In addition, during a valid lever operation period during which the operation of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A may be lit up to notify that the operation of the operating lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is lit up in a lever operation suggestion mode during the valid lever operation period. The lighting mode for the lever operation suggestion may be the same as the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion, or may be a different lighting mode from the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion.

For example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like may be operated by the player to change settings related to the effects, such as the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of music or background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from a menu screen, or a different operation may be performed corresponding to the item to be changed by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. In addition, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lit to notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 10SH)
In relation to characteristic part 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, see JP 2019-051075 A).

Generally, players play games while looking at the display means on which the variable display and various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, there is a possibility that the player will not be aware that the operating means is vibrating even when a vibration effect is executed. In such a case, the interest provided by the vibration effect cannot be sufficiently heightened.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effects are executed and to sufficiently heighten interest in the vibration effects, the gaming machine of means 1 relating to feature section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, etc.), and includes operation means that can be operated by the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a push button 31B that the player can press to perform a predetermined instruction operation, etc.), and vibration effect execution means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates, etc.), and is configured to attract the player's attention. and a visual line guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides a line to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the push button 31B, etc.), and the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 1 20 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when a reach is established, and any one of timing T3 during which a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, and timing T4 during which a reach effect of a super reach is being executed), and is capable of executing the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and The vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether the timing is T1 or T4), the visual line guidance effect execution means does not execute the visual line guidance effect at the first timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute a visual line guidance effect at timings T1 and T2), and can execute the visual line guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a visual line guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timings T3 and T4).

This configuration allows the player to focus on the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and can adequately increase interest in the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 relating to feature 10SH may be such that in the gaming machine of means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 relating to characteristic part 10SH may be equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the gaze guidance effect in the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, etc.).

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be performed while a specific effect is being performed, which can increase interest.

The gaming machine of feature 10SH according to means 4 may be equipped with a display means for displaying information in any of the gaming machines according to means 1 to 3 (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying various presentation images, etc.), and the display of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the display of specified information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information (e.g., the presentation image of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the constant small symbols, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, decorative symbols, etc.).

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring the visibility of the specified information.

The gaming machine of feature 5 relating to feature 10SH is a gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 4, in which the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect of the first mode and the vibration effect of the second mode which suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the first mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed), and when the visual guidance effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed than the first vibration effect (for example, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed).

With this configuration, the gaze guidance effect can be executed, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the execution of the second type of vibration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature of the characteristic feature 10SH may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate. The combined feature features or individual uncombined feature features may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 17-1 shows a configuration example of a performance device related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a performance movable body 32 serving as a movable performance device is provided at the lower end front, which is the lower edge part on the front side overlapping with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to an operation motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be one whose position can be changed by power from, for example, an operation solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame of the movable body 32 is made of a decorative material and has a configuration that can be covered so that the player cannot see the display screen of the image display device 5. The window of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through configuration that allows the player to see the display screen of the image display device 5.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, multiple LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and multiple LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the game machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position to the left of the game area in the game machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position to the right of the game area in the game machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and multiple LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of multiple LEDs built into the operating stick (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of multiple LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be formed in part or in whole from a translucent material. In this way, when the lever lamp 9B1 is lit, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated. Also, when the button lamp 9B2 is lit, the push button 31B can be illuminated.

For example, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or in a position close to the push button 31B, or may be built into the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or provided at the base position of the operation lever. Multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

In the pachinko game machine 1, an operation section performance including a light-emitting performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestive performance that indicates that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration manner according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Note that in the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, one of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. For example, only the push button 31B may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting only the button lamp 9B2.

Figure 17-2 (A) shows an example of the setting of an operation unit performance pattern used to execute an operation unit performance. In this setting example, operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to AKC13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as multiple operation unit performance patterns. A light emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and use are set corresponding to each operation unit performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the light emission state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the vibration state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern indicates the percentage of times that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state when the operation unit presentation corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern is executed. The use corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern indicates the timing at which the operation unit presentation is executed for each operation unit presentation pattern.

The operation unit performance can be executed at multiple times in accordance with the progress of the variable display, such as when the pre-change starts, when the target change starts, when a reach is established, when the reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification tease is given. The pre-change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. The target change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. When a reach is established, it is a timing corresponding to the case where the variable display becomes a reach state. When a reach develops, it is a timing corresponding to the case where a development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of a super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies the execution of the reach performance of a super reach (reach development) after the reach performance of a normal reach is executed. When a hit/miss notification tease is given, it is a timing corresponding to the teasing performance before the hit/miss notification performance that notifies the execution of whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" while the reach performance of a super reach is being executed.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 17-2(A), multiple operation unit performance patterns that can be used to execute operation unit performances according to multiple timings are prepared in advance. Also, it is set up so that different operation unit performance patterns can be used according to multiple timings at which the operation unit performances can be executed.

When the reach performance of the super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach performance of the normal reach is executed and the reach performance of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether the reach performance of the super reach is executed and the fixed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether the game state is controlled to the jackpot. For the reach performance of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach performances including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances with different performance modes. Each reach performance may include performances with a common performance mode. The determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" may be set so that the reliability of the jackpot is according to each reach performance. It is only necessary to set the presence or absence of the reach performance, the presence or absence of the reach performance of the super reach, the performance mode in the reach performance, etc. according to the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random number value for determining the variation pattern.

Regardless of the specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as reach effects, whether or not the operation unit effects are executed can be determined at a predetermined rate according to whether the variable display result is a "jackpot." Such operation unit effects that can be executed regardless of specific effects are also called standalone operation unit effects. In contrast, effects that cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light or vibrate in association with specific effects may be executed. Effects that cause light emission or vibration in association with such specific effects are also called specific linked effects.

Figure 17-2 (B) shows a setting example when a specific interlocking performance is executed. In this setting example, the light emission color and vibration pattern are set when a specific interlocking performance is executed in conjunction with multiple specific performances, such as the movable body operation, image display, music playback, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The light emission color in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is common to the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking performance is included in the special vibration performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance. The illumination of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during a specific linked performance is included in the specific illumination performances that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance.

The reach effect of SP Reach A may have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type selection CH1 may be a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the smallest (e.g., 4 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH2 may be a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is the second jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the largest (e.g., 16 rounds). Note that the jackpot type selection CH1 and CH2 may be selection effects related to the type of jackpot depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot game state, or the end condition, or may be selection effects related to the presence or absence or amount of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, and the increase in the number of rounds. As the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, when the jackpot game state can be controlled to a certain probability state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that entered the V entry port of the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the end conditions of the certain probability control. When the small win game state can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a V entry due to a game ball entering the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a small win game state or a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the jackpot game state controlled after the occurrence of a V entry.

Until the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and then, during the period from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released to the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. Then, when a V winning occurs, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and a performance including the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is more difficult to detect than the strong vibration monitoring state. In a period in which there is a high risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state. In contrast, in a period in which there is a low risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, it is sufficient that the performance control CPU 120 can execute control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, such as displaying an alarm image, outputting an alarm sound, turning on an alarm lamp, outputting an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be stopped from playing under the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100. This allows appropriate vibration monitoring and prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to an inappropriate abnormality judgment resulting in a vibration error being notified or a game being stopped.

Figure 17-3 shows the vibration pattern settings. A number of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Figure 17-3 (A) shows the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects. Figure 17-3 (B) shows the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effects included in the specific linked effects.

Vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on and off periods alternate three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed when the pre-fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the light color of the light effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV02, the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed when the pre-change starts. In addition, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed when the target change starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-change start or the target change start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC02, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC03, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect becomes rainbow. In the operation unit presentation using operation unit presentation pattern AKC11, the color of the light emitted by the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is white in response to the vibration presentation.

In vibration pattern AKV03, the vibration mode has an on period that continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effects by operation unit effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed when the target fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the operation unit effects by vibration pattern AKV03 are not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the target fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is rainbow.

In vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode during the on period matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes orange.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when a reach is reached, an effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is reached. For example, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is reached. Also, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is reached. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is reached and the operation unit effect executed when the pre-change starts or the target change starts. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that an increase in the control burden and control data of the effect can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV21, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the performance AKS1 when a reach develops. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the light color in the light-emitting performance that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration performance becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKS2 when a reach develops. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32, the light color in the light effect that illuminates the stick controller 31A and push button 31B in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach develops, an effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of the reach development. For example, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops. Also, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach develops. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach develops and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-change or the start of the target change. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that the control burden of the effect and the increase in control data can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period may continue until the player's action on the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inviting the winner or loser. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the win/lose notification effect. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, the light color of the light-emitting effect that causes the stick controller 31A and push button 31B to light up in conjunction with the vibration effect is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect is performed by the vibration pattern AKV31, whether or not to set an effective detection period may be different depending on the type of effect executed with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. When a valid detection period is set, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. In addition, when a valid detection period is not set, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have a light-emitting mode for vibration effect that continuously emits gold light over the period in which the operation lever and push button 31B are vibrated. On the other hand, when a valid detection period is set, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between red light emission (on) different from gold and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. By executing a light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode is switched between light-emitting and non-light-emitting every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation of the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is valid while executing the vibration effect. Alternatively, the priority of the light-emitting control may be made different by using a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set. For example, in the first lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between red light-emitting (on) and non-light-emitting (off) every 150 milliseconds. In the second lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a special operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is continuously light-emitting in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. Then, the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is executed with priority over the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. This allows the light effects to be controlled so that the light effects that suggest special operations take precedence over the light effects that suggest normal operations.

The multiple reach effects that become super reaches may include a strong SP reach with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of a strong SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed after a motion detection effect is executed by detecting the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a strong SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode continues for an on period until the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. In the reach effect of a weak SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed without executing a motion detection effect. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a weak SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit/miss notification effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the valid detection period. Alternatively, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds and an off period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B is not vibrated during the valid detection period. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the operation unit performance when a strong SP reach is performed and the operation performance when a weak SP reach is performed. For example, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when a strong SP reach is performed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the valid detection period. In contrast, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when a weak SP reach is performed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds to emit gold light.

Vibration pattern AKV41 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV42 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the screen display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV43 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV44 provides a vibration pattern in which the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

Vibration by vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes blue along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration by vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes gold along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration by vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance that is executed in conjunction with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance changes from blue to red to gold in response to the vibration of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

The vibrations caused by vibration pattern AKV44 may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, or may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, CH2. In specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes white as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH2, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

Figure 17-4 shows an example of an effect that is executed by vibrating and illuminating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, multiple effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B only need to emit light with a normal light emission brightness set to a low light emission color so that the light emission color is white in the normal light emission state. Alternatively, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-illumination so that they do not emit light in the normal light emission state.

In the performance execution example AKA01, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white. When an operation unit performance is executed using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the light color becomes white. The operation unit performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a pre-change. The operation unit performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a target change. Both operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performances using the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22. The light color also becomes white when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific performance.

In the example of effect execution, AKA02, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light color becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. Operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. When playing music for SP Reach A as a specific effect, a performance period in which the light color becomes red is also included.

In the example of effect execution, AKA03, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13, the light-emitting color becomes rainbow. Operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. Operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 have a jackpot reliability of 100%. Operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. Operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. The light-emitting color also becomes rainbow when a specific effect such as a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

In the performance execution example AKA04, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in pink. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 is executed, the light color becomes pink. Operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV11.

In the performance execution example AKA05, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in orange. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 is executed, the light color becomes orange. Operation unit performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV12.

In performance execution example AKV06, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated blue. When an operation section performance is executed, the light color does not turn blue. When the movable body operation of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light color turns blue. Also, when music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light color turns blue is included.

In the performance execution example AKV07, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in gold. When an operation section performance is executed by operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. Operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing an operation section performance during a hit/miss notification. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV31. When an image display of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light emission color becomes gold. Also, when a music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light emission color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the light emission colors of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance. In addition to the light emission color, any light emission mode, such as the light emission time, the number of times light is emitted (the number of times it flashes), the light emission cycle (the flashing cycle), and the light emission brightness, may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance.

When the operation section performance is executed at the start of the advance variation, it can be executed as a pre-reading notice performance or a continuous notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" continuously over multiple variable displays that are executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance can be executed using a continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number. The reserved memory number here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning. As the continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number, multiple continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning, and is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

Figure 17-5 shows an example of the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance. The continuous performance pattern can be determined, for example, by using a random number value for determining the continuous performance pattern, referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and determining the determination result to which a determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the result of the winning determination.

Figure 17-5 (A) shows the continuous performance patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC11 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed.

Figure 17-5 (B) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "3". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 17-5 (C) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "4". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation section performance using any of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using any of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 17-6 is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S161 of Figure 14 as a pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in Figure 17-6, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the execution of a pre-reading notice performance that becomes a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is judged whether or not the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning (starting port winning designation command, pending memory number notification command, winning time judgment result command) has been received. If no command is received, it is judged that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. If a command is received, the notification content according to the received command is identified, and for example, the winning time judgment result is identified as the notification content according to the winning time judgment result command.

The winning judgment result may be a result of judging whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern by the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process process using the game random number extracted at the time of the starting winning. The winning judgment result may be, for example, any of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmed on miss, reach confirmed on miss, or general on miss. The winning judgment result of a jackpot is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot judgment range and is controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result of a super reach confirmed on miss is a judgment result included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach confirmed range on miss, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result for a reach confirmation on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range on a miss. The winning judgment result for a general win on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range on a miss nor within the reach confirmation range.

The pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, the pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the current winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, and all previous winning judgment results corresponding to the reserved memory have been general on a miss. Note that if the pre-reading prediction performance that will result in a consecutive prediction performance is already set to start, the pre-reading prediction condition may be restricted from being established.

If the pre-reading prediction condition is not met (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading prediction setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading prediction condition is met (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction (step AKS102). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction may be extracted, and depending on the result of the winning judgment, a pre-reading prediction execution decision table stored in advance in ROM121 may be referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction, thereby determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance. In step AKS102, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance, either "no execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is not executed, or "execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is executed. It is determined whether or not the result of the decision at this time has been determined to be "execution" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Next, the consecutive performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the consecutive performance pattern may be extracted, and the consecutive performance pattern may be determined to be one of a number of patterns by referring to a consecutive performance pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to the result of the winning judgment.

After the continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105, a pre-reading preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading preview flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control flag setting section) may be set to the ON state.

In such a pre-reading notice setting process, if the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be established, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice in step AKS102 and the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105. If the winning judgment result is a jackpot, step AKS102 may determine "execution yes" to execute the pre-reading notice performance at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, in step AKS105, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. In this way, it is sufficient that the continuous notice performance that becomes the pre-reading notice performance can be executed based on the winning judgment result that becomes the pre-reading judgment result.

Figure 17-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of Figure 14 as a variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 17-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc., which will be the final decorative pattern as the variable display result of the decorative pattern (step AKS201). The performance control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display content, such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The variable pattern designation command and the display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by setting the transmission of the command at the start of the special pattern's variation when the variable pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special pattern process process. The variable pattern designation command is a performance control command that designates the variable pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a performance control command that designates the variable display result determined using a random number value for determining the special pattern display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display results may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probability change (jackpot)", and "probability change (jackpot)".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach miss combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a probability change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns consisting of the same even-numbered patterns is determined as the final stop pattern. Also, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," it is sufficient to be able to determine a combination of fixed decorative patterns consisting of the same odd-numbered patterns as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a non-reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When determining a combination of fixed decorative patterns, for example, numerical data that will be a random number value for pattern determination is extracted, and the stopping pattern of the decorative patterns can be determined by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in ROM121 according to the variable display content.

After the final stop pattern and the like are determined, the operation section presentation is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. For example, if the pre-reading preview flag is on, it may be determined that a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. If a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operation section presentation pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the consecutive presentation pattern. The consecutive presentation pattern may be the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading preview setting process, and may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading preview flag may be cleared to the off state.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not being performed, the presence or absence of the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit performance pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation unit performance may be extracted, and depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot", the presence or absence of the operation unit performance, i.e., whether or not to execute the operation unit performance, and the operation unit performance pattern to be used when executing the operation unit performance may be determined by referring to an operation unit performance determination table previously stored in RAM121. The operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display may be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not being performed, and may not be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is being performed. Therefore, a limit is set for the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit performance included in the pre-reading preview performance is executed.

In step AKS202, when a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance is executed in conjunction with a specific performance based on a fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted. For example, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at any timing. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that all operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit performance at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at the timing corresponding to the development of the reach or the announcement of the hit or miss. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that some operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. In addition, within the range of the variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be set so that some or all of the operation unit effects are difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, which determines the operation unit effects in step AKS202, can limit the execution of the operation unit effects, including the vibration effect, when a special vibration effect is executed.

When the operation unit performance is determined by step AKS202, if a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the result of the judgment at the time of winning, the determination ratio of the operation unit performance may be set so that some or all of the operation unit performance is more likely to be executed during the execution of the variable display than when the special performance is not executed.

After the operation section performance is determined, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (variable display performance control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. The performance control CPU 120 may also select one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (operation section performance control patterns) in response to the operation section performance determined in step AKS202, and set it as the usage pattern. In addition, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the performance control timer setting section) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the decorative pattern or the like is started to vary on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (variable display performance control pattern) determined in step AKS203 can be transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby starting the variation of the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After the variable start setting has been made, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display and the like, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during the variable display (step AKS207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 17-8 shows an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. The performance control pattern includes a variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 17-8 (A) and an operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 17-8 (B). The variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 17-8 (A) includes control data used to control the execution of various performances from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. The operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 17-8 (B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation unit performance.

The variable display performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, and end code. The performance control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the performance control process timer value, which is the stored value of the performance control process timer, and a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (performance time) of each performance operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, data indicating the timing of switching the performance control, etc., may be set in response to a specified control content or processing content, such as, for example, a specified performance control command being received from the main board 11, or a specified process being executed as a process for controlling a performance operation in the performance control CPU 120.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variable mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects etc. linked to the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating the light emission drive mode of light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of light-emitting bodies during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes data indicating the performance operation mode corresponding to the detection of the player's action, such as the effective detection period during which the player's action, such as tilting the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, pointing to the trigger button, or pressing the push button 31B, is effectively detected, and data specifying the control content of the performance operation when each action is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating, for example, the on period and drive mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all performance control patterns, and there may be performance control patterns that include some of the control data depending on the content of the performance action by each performance control pattern. Furthermore, for multiple types of process data included in a performance control pattern, the type of control data that makes up each process data may differ depending on the content of the performance action executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data that includes all of the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and there may be process data that includes some of these. Furthermore, various other control data may be included, such as movable body control data that indicates the operating state of the movable body 32.

In the variable display performance processing in step S172 of the performance control process processing, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, a determination is made as to whether it matches any of the performance control process timer judgment values, and if it does match, control of the performance operation is performed according to the various corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 proceeds with the control of the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, light-emitting elements such as game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) according to the contents of process data #1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the performance control pattern. In addition, in each process data #1 to #n, the display control data #1 to #n, audio control data #1 to #n, lamp control data #1 to #n, operation detection control data #1 to #n, and vibration control data #1 to #n correspond to the performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n, and constitute the performance control execution data #1 to #n that indicate the control content of the performance operation in the performance device and specify the execution of performance control.

The operation unit performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, and vibration control data. The lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light-emitting body in the operation unit performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data that indicates the on period and drive mode of the vibration generating device in the operation unit performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131. In other words, the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance.

Figure 17-9 shows an example of the timing settings for the operation section performance in vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings at which the operation section performance can be executed at the start of pre-change, corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the pre-change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, the operation section performance can be executed at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-change, depending on the remaining number of times. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT01, if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT02, and if the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 17-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target change, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance can be executed at the start of the target change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the advance change, the operation unit performance can be executed with the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times, and then at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance can be executed with the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times being "0". Also, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance may be executed. Specifically, if one of the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit performance can be executed with the determined operation unit performance pattern at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change.

The timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be such that the operation unit performance can be executed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the operation unit performance can be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Figure 17-9 are timings at which the operation unit presentation when a reach is established, when a reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification is triggered can be executed as operation unit presentations corresponding to the current variable display. For example, depending on the operation unit presentation pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, there are cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach develops, and cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT14 when a hit/miss notification is triggered. Specifically, if either operation unit presentation pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Also, if step AKS202 determines that either operation unit presentation pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT13, which is the time when the reach develops. Alternatively, if step ASK202 determines that operation unit presentation pattern AKC41 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time when the win/loss notification is triggered.

Figure 17-10 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 17-10 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in Figure 17-10 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 17-10 (B). The light emission performance associated with this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 lighting up in white in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 17-10 (A). During the off period of the vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not light up and are turned off. In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 300 milliseconds.

Figure 17-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 17-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 17-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 17-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 17-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds as shown in Figure 17-11 (B). As shown in FIG. 17-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC02, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors by transitioning between red, reddish purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange light colors according to the elapsed time and the light emission position. The light emission positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be specified as multiple sections, such as the top and bottom of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and it is sufficient that the light emission time, light emission color, and light emission brightness may be partially or entirely set according to each section.

Figure 17-12 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC11. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC11 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 17-12 (A) becomes white, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV02 shown in Figure 17-12 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds as shown in Figure 17-12 (B). The light emission presentation accompanying this vibration presentation is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in white in accordance with the on period of the vibration presentation, as shown in Figure 17-12 (A). In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically during the on-period of 1500 milliseconds, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds.

Figure 17-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC12 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 17-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 17-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC13 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 17-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 17-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 17-13 (B). As shown in FIG. 17-13(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC12, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may periodically change the light emission brightness of red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with a high light emission brightness of red light and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 has a light emission mode that changes the light emission brightness in a shorter period than the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. In this way, the light emission performance may be performed in a different light emission period as well as a different light emission color, so that the reliability of a big win can be suggested. During the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternating between red light emission and non-emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light-emitting effect, the light emission cycle may be common, but the light emission color may be different to indicate the reliability of a jackpot. In this way, for example, when the light-emitting colors in the light-emitting effects are different, the control burden of the light-emitting effects may be reduced by commonizing the light-emitting cycle.

Figure 17-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed in response to the performance AKR1 shown in Figure 17-14 (A) which becomes the performance when the reach is established at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 17-14 (B) becomes pink, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in Figure 17-14 (C). The performance AKR1 which becomes the performance when the reach is established may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a performance that displays a background image according to the reach establishment, or may be any other performance associated with the establishment of the reach. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds) as shown in Figure 17-14 (C). As shown in FIG. 17-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in pink in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the OFF period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off.

Figure 17-15 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22. The operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, shown in Figure 17-15 (A), at the timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 17-15 (B) becomes orange, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV12 shown in Figure 17-15 (C). Presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, may be, for example, a presentation that displays a presentation image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a presentation that displays a background image according to the establishment of a reach, or may be any other presentation associated with the establishment of a reach. Presentation AKR1 and presentation AKR2, which are the presentations when a reach is established, may have different presentation forms. As shown in FIG. 17-15(C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is a vibration mode including an on period of the first vibration on time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) alternately repeated twice, followed by an on period of the second vibration on time (e.g., 250 milliseconds) and an on period of the third vibration on time (e.g., 500 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 17-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In addition, when the on period of the vibration effect is a different vibration on time, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange continuously. In contrast, during the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently. During the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternate between emitting orange light and not emitting light every 20 milliseconds, thereby intermittently emitting orange light.

The operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the performances AKS1 and AKS2 when the reach develops, and include a light emission performance in which the light color becomes white, and a vibration performance by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC32, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS2. In both cases of operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the light emission performance associated with these vibration performances is that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the win/lose prompting performance at the timing AKT14 when the win/lose notification is prompted, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. The light emission performance accompanying this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 lighting up in gold in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

As shown in FIG. 17-12 and FIG. 17-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect includes the case where the light emission color becomes white and the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, which is different from white. When the light emission color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03, which is different from vibration pattern AKV02, is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs when the light emission color becomes white and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that when the light emission color becomes red and when the light emission color becomes rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both cases. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32. In this way, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops have a common light-emitting color of white, and the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes are common, while the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the interest in the game. In addition, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 or AKC13. As in this case, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops may have different light-emitting modes and different vibration modes. As in the case where the light-emitting color becomes white, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is common to the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Also, as in the case where the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts may include a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is different from the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not have to include an illumination pattern of the illumination effect that is different from the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered include operation unit effects by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes gold in association with the vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV31. This operation unit effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered have a common jackpot reliability of 100%, and there are cases in which the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different. In addition, the light emission color and vibration pattern of the vibration effect are different between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the reliability of the big hit is the same, but the vibration pattern of the vibration effect or the light emission pattern of the light emission effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be increased.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white, red, or rainbow in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is achieved, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting patterns of the light-emitting patterns and the vibration patterns of the vibration effects differ between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is achieved. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section performance differs, the light emission mode of the light emission performance differs, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance differs, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in playing can be increased.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting state of the light-emitting state differs between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect differs. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light emission state of the light emission performance or the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a white light emission color. Also, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a pink or orange light emission color. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, even if the light emission state of the light emission performance is the same, the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, the jackpot reliability is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing when the vibration performance is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration effect can be varied by varying the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity caused by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong and weak vibrations in vibration intensity, or any other vibration pattern that vibrates an operating member such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

The multiple specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the moving body operation, image display, music playback, or the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. Therefore, the vibration performance by the operation unit performance has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach performance of SP Reach A, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state when executed is higher. The moving body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A are all executed as part of the reach performance, so they do not have individual jackpot reliability. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is a performance that definitely notifies that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 differ from effects with a high jackpot reliability, such as the SP Reach A reach effect, in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this way, for a specific effect that has a high jackpot reliability among multiple specific effects, it is sufficient that the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit effect than when the specific effect is executed. Also, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit effect than when the vibration effect is not executed by the operation unit effect.

Figure 17-16 shows an example of the performance of effects achieved by illuminating the game effect lamps 9. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. Here, multiple performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the mode of performance execution by illuminating the lights.

In performance execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to red in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In the performance execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in red to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors due to the illumination effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes an illumination effect in which the illumination color becomes rainbow in conjunction with the vibration effect.

In performance execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white display color from left to right, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated to change from black to white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated white by a lighting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a lighting effect in which the light color changes to white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In performance execution example AKF04, when the text display on the image display device 5 is blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in blue to match the text display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color becomes white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

For example, a predetermined performance by displaying background display, text display, or any other performance image on the image display device 5 can be executed according to the progress of the game, including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the performance processing during variable display executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing, control is performed to execute a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, such as variable display, using control data read from the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting processing. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5 and lamp control data for controlling the emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. If an operation unit performance is executed during the execution of such a predetermined performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 can light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance in the operation unit performance. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the control data read from the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the execution of the operation unit performance. This control data includes lamp control data for controlling the emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. In response to the emission performance associated with the vibration performance in such an operation unit performance, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a different light emission mode from the light emission performance of the operation unit performance in accordance with a predetermined performance. In this way, by making the emission modes different between the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, the performance by light emission can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

The predetermined performance may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in a color that matches the audio output, such as background music, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in a color that matches the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R are used to output a sound that is a message that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in red in accordance with the audio output, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in white by the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. Even in this way, by making the light-emitting modes of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A different from those of the other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N different, the light-emitting effects can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. The predetermined effect may be to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and make the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. non-illuminated (turned off). When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 17-17 shows an example of the setting of the performance period in which a specific linked performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in association with the movement of the movable body in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in association with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects using vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with the playback of music in the reach effect of SP Reach A. The specific linked effects that can be executed in period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B changes from blue to red to gold in conjunction with the special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV43.

The period AKZ04 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific linked effects executable during period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B becomes rainbow-colored in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44. The jackpot confirmation notification may be any notification that allows the player to recognize a jackpot by stopping and displaying a confirmed decorative pattern that results in the display of a decorative pattern, displaying a performance image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach presentation, outputting a jackpot confirmation notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, turning on a jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these.

In addition, following the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, a specific link performance may be executed during the period AKZ04 associated with the jackpot confirmation notification. In this case, the specific link performance associated with the jackpot confirmation notification can be executed while the operation unit performance heightens the player's sense of expectation, thereby enhancing the impression of the performance and improving the interest in playing. When executing a specific link performance following such an operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance or the special vibration performance may be different between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance, or the light emission mode of the light emission performance or the specific light emission performance may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration performance and the special vibration performance. The light emission brightness may be different between the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance. By making the vibration mode and light emission mode different to give the performance a sharp contrast, the difference between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance can be easily recognized, the performance can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in playing can be improved.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes white in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes rainbow in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

Figures 17-18 to 17-20 show cases where the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Figure 17-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when a movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 17-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when an image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 17-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when a music is played in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the reach mode and the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position at the lower front end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Next, when the reach performance of the SP reach A is started by the reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, as in the performance execution example AKG01, and the movable body operation is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linear movement or parallel movement upward from the initial position, and a performance image showing a message such as "SP reach A" is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part provided inside the movable body 32. After that, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the performance execution example AKG02. At this time, a performance image showing a message such as "This change is ..." is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part of the movable body 32.

As the position of the movable body 32 is changed, as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed along with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 17-17. When the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the performance execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ01 ends. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that becomes an on period in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrates every 250 milliseconds and an off period in which no vibration occurs. Also, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that continuously lights up the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in blue over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that switches between blue light (on) and no light (off) every 250 milliseconds.

When the movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a light pattern in which the light color and light brightness gradually change from bottom to top as the position of the movable body 32 is changed. For example, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a blue light color and with a light brightness that changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time.

After the movable body operation is completed as in performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in performance execution example AKG11, as an image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. At this time, for example, text display showing the message "Super Hot" is displayed in a gold display color. Also, as in performance execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the text display.

In conjunction with the display of the performance image, which is an image display such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed in conjunction with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold during the period AKZ02 shown in Figure 17-17. When the display of the text indicating the message ends and the display of the performance image in the reach performance different from the text display begins, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking performance in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the text display indicating the message "Super Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ02. Also, during period AKZ02, a specific light-emitting effect may be performed by illuminating the operating lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a light-emitting mode that alternates between a first luminance with a high gold light emission brightness and a second luminance with a low gold light emission brightness every 10 milliseconds.

When image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, for example, to match the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 and the emission color of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of a performance image resulting in an image display such as performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, and when the display of a performance image such as performance execution example AKG13 begins, they may emit light of a color different from gold.

After the display of a performance image as in performance execution example AKG13 has begun, the sound of music phrase PH01 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A as in performance execution example AKG21. Next, the sound of music phrase PH02 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG22. After that, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG23. In this way, by outputting the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 in sequence as the performance progresses, it is possible to execute the overall music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

In conjunction with the output of sound that results in music playback as in performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific linked performance is executed, causing the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to vibrate and emit light. The specific linked performance executed in conjunction with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV43 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color changes from blue to red, and then from red to gold, during the period AKZ03 shown in Figure 17-17. In performance execution example AKG21, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes blue in response to the sound output of music phrase PH01. In performance execution example AKG22, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes red in response to the sound output of music phrase PH02. In performance execution example AKG23, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes gold in response to the sound output of music phrase PH03. In this way, it is possible to execute a specific light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to multiple colors as the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 are output in sequence as the effect progresses.

Figure 17-21 shows a music playback execution example AKH01 in which the scales change in sequence as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in Figure 17-21 (A), during a period AKZ03 in which a specific linked performance can be executed in conjunction with music playback, sounds corresponding to the scales of Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Si, and Do are output by speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of Do output last needs to be one octave higher than the scale of Do output first.

Such a specific linked performance associated with music playback includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color changes as shown in FIG. 17-21(B) and a vibration performance in which the special vibration performance is based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 17-21(C), and can be executed during a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration performance shown in FIG. 17-21(C) is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. In the specific light-emitting performance associated with this special vibration performance, the light-emitting color of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 changes in sequence between blue, red, and gold in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration performance, as shown in FIG. 17-21(B). During the stop period of the sound output and the off period of the special vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may not emit light and may be turned off. Note that during the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting performance may be different for each scale. For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously illuminated in blue over a period corresponding to the scale of C that is first output. Next, during a period corresponding to the scale of D, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between a first luminance with a high red illumination luminance and a second luminance with a low red illumination luminance. After that, during a period corresponding to the scale of E, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between gold illumination (lit) and non-illumination (unlit). In this way, by providing illumination modes with different amounts of illumination for each illumination color corresponding to each scale, the presentation can be appropriately diversified and interest in the game can be increased.

The reach performance of SP Reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display performance control pattern shown in FIG. 17-8 (A) is set to be able to execute a specific linked performance in association with a specific performance such as the movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A by the lamp control data and vibration control data. In the specific linked performance, a special vibration performance can be executed by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance by the vibration pattern in the operation unit performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation unit performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in association with the execution of the specific performance, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When an operation section performance is executed, a vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is accompanied by a light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a specific linked performance is executed, a specific light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is executed in conjunction with a special vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. By executing a performance that includes vibration and light emission of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, for example, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 will recognize the vibration and light emission of the operation members that are different from the image display, and the unexpectedness of the performance will be enhanced.

During the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 17-17, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movement of movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP Reach A. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect during the movement period of movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 17-17, in response to a confirmed jackpot notification, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific linkage effects include specific light emission effects in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 light up in association with a special vibration effect produced by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the operation unit effects and the specific light emission effects accompanying the special vibration effects in the specific linkage effects differ in terms of light emission patterns, such as light color. In this way, by making the light emission patterns different depending on the operation unit effects and the specific linkage effects, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 17-10 and 17-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 17-12 and 17-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, and the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are executed at different times and have different vibration patterns. In addition, the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the pre-variation, and the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are white, red, or rainbow, so that the light emission patterns of the light emission patterns are the same. In this way, by providing cases where the vibration patterns of the vibration effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different, while the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are the same, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, are executed in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the operation unit effects are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, based on the winning time judgment result, which is the pre-reading judgment result. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit effects are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 17-10 and FIG. 17-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start of the pre-variation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the light emission color is white and when the light emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effects is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby appropriately diversifying the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increasing the interest in the game. Note that when the light emission color is red and when the light emission color is rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance patterns used to execute the continuous preview performance include operation unit performance patterns in which the light emission color in the light emission performance differs depending on whether the remaining number is other than "0" or "0". For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 17-5 (A) includes an operation unit performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number is "1" and an operation unit performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number is "0". The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes white. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission mode is different between the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. In this way, by providing different lighting conditions for the lighting effects when the timing for executing the operation section effects differs, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous notice performance, the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is set to prevent the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large from being lower than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 17-5 (A), if the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". If the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 or the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This prevents the operation unit performance with a low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation, etc., even though the operation unit performance with a high jackpot reliability was executed first at the start of the pre-variation, so that the player's expectations are not lowered and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Also, as shown in Figures 17-10 and 17-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white, and when the light emission color is white, light emission and non-emission are repeated in accordance with the on and off periods of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted continuously in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIG. 17-12 and FIG. 17-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white. When the light emission color is white, light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03. The vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 have different on period settings, so the light emission patterns, such as the light emission period of the light emission effects, are different. Even in this way, it is sufficient to provide cases where the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different.

(Modifications of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific linked performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific linked performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree. Regarding the specific linked effects, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any degree of advantage related to the game on the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such degree of advantage.

The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different and when it is common, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance is different and when it is common, when the jackpot reliability is different and when it is common, etc., can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of execution is different and when it is common between the operation unit performance and the specific linked performance, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance and the special vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance is different and when it is common, can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission performance by making the light emission mode of the light emission performance common. When the light emission modes of the light emission performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making the vibration mode of the vibration performance common. When some vibration modes in the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making other vibration modes in the vibration performance common. For example, if the vibration intensities in the vibration effects are different, the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by standardizing the vibration cycles in the vibration effects. If some of the light emission patterns in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing other light emission patterns in the light emission effects. For example, if the light emission colors in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing the light emission cycles in the light emission effects. The control burden can also be reduced by similar standardization for the vibration patterns of special vibration effects and the light emission patterns of specific light emission effects.

In addition to or instead of during execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to any game state such as a small win game state or a big win game state, the operation unit performance or the specific linked performance may be executable. For example, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of the V winning attacker opening, the opening time, the number of openings, or the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. When the game is controlled to a big win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the big win game state, the end conditions, the presence or absence of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the big win game state, and the amount of increase. Specific linked performance may be executed in conjunction with specific performances such as moving objects, image display, and music playback in the small win game state or the big win game state.

The specific effect capable of executing a specific linked effect may be any effect that can be executed in response to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, when a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" at a certain rate and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the specific linked effect may be executable during some or all of the effect period.

When controlled to any presentation state, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations. For example, when controlled to a presentation state that is a special presentation mode, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations at a higher rate than when controlled to a presentation state that is a presentation mode other than the special presentation mode.

The operating member capable of executing effects by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects the operation of a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects the touch operation or pressing operation on a touch panel. In addition, a sensor that can detect a predetermined motion by the player, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor, may be used. The motion of the player may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands, etc. using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can detect the predetermined motion of the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be used. In addition to such a motion detection member, a contact member that the player can contact with his/her hand, etc. may be provided, and the contact member may be vibrated or illuminated together with or separately from the motion detection member.

The vibration effects included in the operation unit performance may correspond to the vibration effect in the characteristic part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK, and the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit performance, the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit performance, the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effect included in the operation unit performance may correspond to the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the characteristic part 48AK, the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK, and the light emission effect accompanying the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01 to AKT03, which is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The special vibration effect included in the specific linked effect may correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time will be saved.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving pattern may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability/low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be confirmed may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be confirmed.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating means emits light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern. The fact that the rate of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, in the light colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be common between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common, for example, when the light emission color is white. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11, AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a text image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing a vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute a visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect in accordance with the progress of a game, the proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the vibration effect execution means can execute a special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the operation unit effect control pattern or the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light-emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, the reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher rate of control to an advantageous state when a predetermined vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to an operation unit performance pattern. The different rate of control to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the use of the operation unit performance pattern. The ability to execute a special vibration performance may be, for example, execution of a vibration performance in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05. The different vibration modes between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be common when the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11, AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the different vibration mode may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., different from the vibration patterns AKV21, AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a predetermined vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. at step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. at step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The execution of the predetermined vibration effect may have a higher rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the execution of the specific effect. Here, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation rate of 50% or more, which is higher than the execution of the reach effect of SP Reach A.
In such a configuration, the player's anticipation for the specified vibration effects can be heightened, improving his/her interest in the game.

The specific effect execution means may execute an effect of moving a movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect execution means may execute a special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notification of a confirmed jackpot. The special vibration effect in response to this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The light emission effect execution means can execute a specific light emission effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with a special vibration effect, and the light emission form may be different between the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emission effect associated with the special vibration effect. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission form may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, different from when the light emission color changes from blue or gold, or from blue to red and then to gold.
According to such a configuration, the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when the operation unit effect is determined in step AKS202.
According to this configuration, the vibration effects can be appropriately executed to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a first vibration effect and a second vibration effect as vibration effects that vibrate the operating means, and a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the gaming machine that is controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the gaming machine that is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect, and the timing of execution of the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are different, and the vibration state is different, and the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission performance may be, for example, the lighting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light emission performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is different according to the light emission state of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the timing of execution is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a pre-variation start timing AKT01 to AKT03 that is different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The fact that the vibration mode is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 that is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a case where the light emission color included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when the developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached the reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a second vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the second vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a text image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing, and is capable of executing the second vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. The case where it is possible to execute the gaze guidance effect at the second timing may be, for example, the case of timing T3 or T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory may be, for example, a variable display that is a pre-variable.

The light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the first vibration performance includes a first vibration light emission mode and a second vibration light emission mode different from the first vibration light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the first vibration performance may be different when the light emission performance is performed in the first vibration light emission mode and when the light emission performance is performed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the first vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous performance pattern, the light emission color of the operation unit performance pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0".
In such a configuration, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each of the features 48AK to 50AK may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as suggestion performances that suggest control to the advantageous state;
a development performance execution means capable of executing a first development performance before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified, and capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a performance result of the second suggestion performance;
A chance-up effect execution means for executing a chance-up effect in which the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the number of times the effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect;
A revival special performance execution means capable of executing a revival special performance that notifies the player that the advantageous state will be controlled after the suggestion performance is executed and a performance result is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled;
An operation means operable by a player;
A vibration effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance-up effect execution means includes:
The chance-up effect can be executed so that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed,
The chance-up effect can be executed such that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed,
A plurality of types of chance-up effects including a specific type of chance-up effect can be executed,
When the chance-up effect of a specific mode is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the suggestion effect,
A first period during which the revival special effect is executed is shorter than a second period during which the fourth suggestion effect ends after it is notified that the second suggestion effect will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the second suggestion effect,
The revival special performance execution means, when the fourth suggestion performance is executed after the second development performance is executed, does not execute the revival special performance,
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect,
The predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect have different aspects.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images